JP6631504B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a communication state in which one end of a first passage member and a second passage member formed so as to allow a ball to communicate with each other and a separated state in which the ball is separated are formed. (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-171636 A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to stably feed a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the feeding of a ball from a first passage member to a second passage member. I do.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced, communication with one end each other of the first passage member and the second passage member is possible to throw the ball from the first passage member is communicated to the second passage member, one end of the first passage member is the are those in which the separation state to the spaced from one end of the second passage member first passage member and the second passage member is a non-communicating is possible to form the first passage member or the second passage member displaceably while being disposed on one end of one of the one end each other of the first passage member or the second the first passage member in a state where the other to the displaced in contact with the passage member and the second passage member Connection for communication between Wherein the one of the first passage member or the second passage member includes a housing portion for accommodating the connection members.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect , the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of an upper lifting unit. It is a front view of an upper lifting unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper elevating unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of an upper elevating unit. (A) is a front view of the first gear, (b) is a rear view of the first gear, (c) is a front view of the second gear, and (d) is a second gear. FIG. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side slide member. FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of a driving slide member. It is a rear view of a drive side slide member. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26A, and FIG. 26C is an arrow in FIG. It is a rear view of the connection member seen in XXVIc direction. It is a rear view of a 2nd passage formation member and a connection member. It is a rear view of a 2nd passage formation member and a connection member. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. 29. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left swing unit. It is a front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a swing operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a swing operation unit. It is a front view of a swing operation unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of the rotation unit in the state where the guide member was removed. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of the rotation unit in the state where the rotation member, a part of the pitching device, and the guide member were removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. (A) is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-side rotation member and the other-side rotation member along a line LIb-LIb in FIG. 51 (a). is there. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit cut | disconnected by the plane containing the rotation axis of a center transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. (A) is a front view of the rotating member, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of a division member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a division member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a division member. It is an exploded back perspective view of a division member. (A) and (b) are the upper surface perspective view and the lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned at the 1st area. (A) and (b) are the upper surface perspective view and the lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned at the 2nd area. It is an exploded front perspective view of a throwing device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a throwing device. It is an exploded front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of the pitching apparatus in the state where the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism was arranged in the holding position. It is a front view of the pitching apparatus in the state where the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism was arranged at the separation position. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding pieces are arranged at a protruding position. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at a retracted position. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the protruding position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the holding piece retracting mechanism along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. It is sectional drawing. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the holding piece retracting mechanism along the line LXIXb-LXIXb in FIG. 69 (a). It is sectional drawing. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a rear perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotating member. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the first section, and (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the second section. (A) to (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member is rotated by 30 degrees. FIG. 9 is a state relationship diagram showing a relationship between a state of engagement or disengagement of one side rotation drive member and another side rotation drive member with respect to a divided member and a phase. (A) to (c) are state transition diagrams for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. It is the elements on larger scale which expanded the part in the 1st section of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of the distal end wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the distal end wall member, and (c) is a line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 79 (b). It is sectional drawing of the main body member of a front-end wall member, (d) is a front view of the main body member of a front-end wall member. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit and the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a), and (c). FIG. 4 is a partial front view of a drive side slide member.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. Note that the inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and has a window portion 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  On the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is constantly urged in the front direction. By sliding the ball-pulling lever 52 in the rearward direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally drops from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand boxes") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is the rear surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball on the front. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (the winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion (a lower left portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be properly used depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and the round during the jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the winning probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state where the probability of change is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of hit is lower than that in the case of probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) of the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which a ball is likely to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is awarded to the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and outputs the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing a variable display, and an LED for varying display of a second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes is used as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening that is opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large-sized 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first symbol display device 37A displays the game state. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as display symbols (second symbols (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time a ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only in the operating state (open).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than in the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or during the time saving, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device. If the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out of order. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 is different from the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (extended state), so that the ball is unlikely to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (retracted) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than during normal times. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 can be created during the probability change and during the working hours, as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of a big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for a player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, when the ball is passed through the through gate 67 during the probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened and the second winning opening 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening / closing frontward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is hard to win. At the time of the big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  A second variable winning device 82a is provided at the upper left of the first winning opening 64, and a second specific winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (becomes an enlarged state) at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, a 15R probability variable jackpot), a special game state in which the ball can easily win the second specific winning port 82 is established. Can be.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is lit on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side above the first winning opening 64. Alternatively, it may be to the left of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like. The stamp, etc. stuck to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is provided below the first winning port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is provided with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (fire launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) non-openably connect the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I / Os, and the like. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the process at the time of the power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launch strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch a ball is given by the main control device 110. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of turning operation (rotating position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation The display control unit 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and issues the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

  FIGS. 6 and 7 show a state in which the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position. In FIGS. 9A and 9B, a second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 and a first path forming member of the left swing unit 500 are shown. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the liquid crystal 520 is connected to the liquid crystal lifting unit 520, and FIG. FIGS. 6 to 10 show a state in which the upper elevating unit 300 is arranged at the ascending position.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and includes an upper elevating unit 300, a liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and a left swing unit in an inner space of the rear case 210. 500, a rotation unit 600, and a light emitting decoration member 700 are respectively housed.

  The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall 211 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 212 erected from four outer edges of the bottom wall 211 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. The bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 has a recess having a substantially circular frontal shape at the center thereof, and the rotating unit 600 is housed in the recess. The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper elevating unit 300, the left swing unit 500, and the decorative light emitting member 700 are connected to the upper edge, the left edge, and the lower edge of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. It is arranged in each part.

  The upper lifting unit 300 includes a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) lifting members 330 arranged in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 8), and the lifting members 330 are independently provided in the height direction (FIG. 8). It is formed to be able to move up and down (up and down) (see FIGS. 12 and 13). In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the lowered position, when the elevating body 330 is arranged at the elevating position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 8). When the 330 is arranged at the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

  The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 has a pair of guide rods 451 that are disposed in a vertical position with their axes aligned in the vertical direction and that are disposed at predetermined intervals in the width direction. A drive slide member 420 and a driven slide member 430 supported so as to be slidably displaced, and a drive motor 441 that drives the drive slide member 420 up and down, the drive motor 441 drives the drive slide member 420 up and down. Accordingly, the driven-side slide member 430 is driven to move up and down.

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 is raised, the drive side slide member 420 pushes the driven side slide member 430 upward while resisting the action of gravity, while the drive side slide member 420 is lowered. The driven slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight as the drive slide member 420 is lowered.

  The drive side slide member 420 is provided with a second passage forming member 422, and the driven side slide member 430 is provided with a display device 81 shown in FIG. When the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position between the raised position and the lowered position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (FIG. 9). Further, when the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the ascending position, the upper area of the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the upper elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

  The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that swings in a direction of raising and lowering the distal end side around the base end side. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the front end side, it is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 9), and the front end side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, while When it is swung in the direction of swinging the distal end side down, it is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 to the second passage forming member 422 is released.

  The ball flowing down the game area is allowed to flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 is flowed in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 9). The thrown ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating and lowering unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10). The inflow ball is sent to the game area via a passage provided separately from the first passage forming member 520 and described later.

  The rotating unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate roulette. That is, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotating disk) formed rotatably, and the wheel formed by partitioning the wheel in the circumferential direction are colored red or black and different numbers are displayed. (A display plate 646 and a partition plate 647) corresponding to a pocket to be thrown, and a ball B thrown from a device on the inner peripheral side of the wheel (a pitching device 650) is provided. It is formed to fall on either.

  In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the lower position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotating unit 600 is shielded by the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 so as to be invisible to the player, while the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is at the connection position. In the arrangement state (see FIG. 9), a part (lower part) of a member corresponding to the wheel is exposed, and in the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the ascending position (see FIG. 10), In addition to the part (lower part) of the corresponding member, the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel and the path from when the ball B is thrown to when the ball B falls to the part corresponding to the pocket are They are exposed and made visible to the player.

  The light emitting decoration member 700 includes a case body formed of a light transmissive material, and a plurality of LEDs disposed inside the case body, and forms a light emitted from the LED (for example, a light emitting LED). By changing the number and the light emission time), an effect by light emission is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 to FIG. 20, detailed configurations of the upper elevating unit 300, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotating unit 600, and the light emitting decoration member 700 will be described. First, the upper lifting unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper elevating unit 300. 11 and 12 show a state in which all the lifting and lowering bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 12) are arranged at the ascending position. In FIG. 13, all the lifting and lowering bodies 330 are lowered. The state where it is arranged at the position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the upper elevating unit 300, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating bodies 330 are arranged in the width direction of the base member 310 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape. It is configured to be able to move up and down between a raised position (see FIG. 12) and a lowered position (see FIG. 13). Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each lifting / lowering body 330 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear exploded perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a base member 310 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and a space for accommodating the transmission device 350 between the base member 310 and the base member 310. A rear cover 320 fastened and fixed to the rear side, an elevating body 330 in which a rack 332 is accommodated between the base member 310 and the rear cover 320 and a circular effect part 331 is arranged on the front side of the base member 310; A driving device 340 which is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 and generates a driving force required for the elevating body to move up and down, and a transmission device 350 which transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the elevating body 330 Prepare.

  The cover member 310 includes a semicircular recess 311 having a semicircular shape in which the center of the circle is disposed at the lower end and recessed from the front side surface toward the rear side, and a rack 332 of the elevating body 330 from the rear side surface. A guide rib 312 protruding in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap left and right.

  The semicircular recessed portion 311 has a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the staging portion 331 of the elevating body 320, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the staging portion 331 are vertical. Are arranged at positions that match. Accordingly, when the rendering section 331 moves upward, it is possible to move to a position just before the position where it interferes with the semicircular recessed section 311 on the front side of the base member 310, while securing the vertical width of the base member 310. Also, it is possible to ensure a large ascending movement width of the effect part 331.

  The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-like portion extending in the vertical direction, and protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the elevating body 330 from moving in the left-right direction during the elevating movement (parallel movement or tilting operation).

  Further, by forming the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recess recessed from the front side to the back side, the area in which the back side can be made invisible can be increased as compared with the case where the space penetrates in the front-back direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for arranging a mechanical portion (a portion not intended to be visually recognized by a player, such as a gear and a motor).

  The rear cover 320 includes a main body 321 configured in a case shape with the front side and the lower part opened, a cylindrical shaft support 322 protruding from the main body 321 to the front, and a front surface from the shaft support 322. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole formed in a state where the extension direction coincides with the vertical direction at a position displaced in the left-right direction when viewed, and a support portion from a bottom portion around which the upper support portion 322 protrudes. 322 and a locking portion 324 formed in a rib shape along the radial direction.

  The shaft support portion 322 is a portion that supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, respectively, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the lifting / lowering operation of the lifting / lowering body 330.

  The locking portion 324 is disposed vertically above and below the axis of the upper shaft support portion 322, and the first portion is provided in a state where the lifting / lowering body 330 is disposed at the ascending position or the descending position, respectively. The end of the locking arc 351c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be brought into contact in the rotation direction.

  The elevating body 330 includes an effect portion 331 configured in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 fixed to the back surface of the effect portion 331 and extending vertically in a position spaced from the rear side surface of the effect portion 331. , Is provided.

  The rendering unit 331 is a part in which a circular liquid crystal panel is disposed inside a circular outer frame, and performs rendering by displaying patterns and graphics on the liquid crystal panel.

  The rack 332 includes a slide shaft 332 a protruding to the rear side and protruding to a position where the rack 332 is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the rear cover 320.

  The slide shaft 332a does not have a plurality of protrusions but one protrusion. Therefore, the number of the guide holes 323 can be reduced to one, so that the space for disposing the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction can be suppressed and a large moving distance of the rack 332 can be secured. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can be brought into contact with the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at one position, the rack 332 is not moved in the left-right direction. Can be prevented. Thereby, when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, it is possible to prevent the staging part 331 from swinging in the left-right direction, and also prevent the interval between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 from fluctuating, thereby preventing the meshing relationship from deteriorating. be able to.

  The driving device 340 includes a driving motor 341 that is a driving source fastened and fixed to the back cover 320, and a driving gear 342 that is rotated by rotation of a driving shaft of the driving motor 341 and transmits driving force to the transmission device 350. .

  The transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support 322 and meshes with the drive gear 342, and meshes with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and is supported by the shaft support 322. And a second gear 352.

  As described above, the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating members 330 are provided with the independent driving motors 341, respectively. It can be individually moved up and down. Note that, since the technical ideas of the lifting members 330 are common, the lifting member 330 arranged at the left end in FIG. 11 will be described below, and the description of the other lifting members 330 will be omitted.

  Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16B is a rear view of the first gear 351, and FIG. 16C is a front view of the second gear 352. FIG. 16D is a rear view of the second gear 352.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the first gear 351 has a through hole through which the shaft support 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and a main body 351a in which gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. In the outer peripheral surface of the main body 351a, the portion where the formation of the gear teeth is omitted is extended to about half the tooth length of the gear teeth (extends to the pitch circle C1 in which the contacts of the meshing teeth are connected). Abutment portion 351b formed to extend in the radial direction with an extension length), and a locking projection protruding from the rear side surface of main body portion 351a in an arc shape centered on the axis along a direction parallel to the axis. And an arc portion 351c.

  The abutting portion 351b has a distal end surface in a radial direction having an arc shape with a radius r around the center axis of the main body portion 351a, and a tooth thickness (arc) of approximately two to three gear teeth formed on the main body portion 351a. (The tooth thickness in the range of approximately 45 degrees to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main body 351a is longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, the strength in the circumferential direction can be secured as compared with the gear teeth of the main body 351a.

  The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose distal end in the circumferential direction can contact the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the rear cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. Has a role.

  As shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D, the second gear 352 includes two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the rear side, and has an intermediate plate 353 configured in a donut plate shape. And a modified gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially irregular tooth profile, and a spur gear formed on the rear side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with a rack 332 (see FIG. 15). And a transmission gear unit 355.

  The intermediate plate 352 is formed so as to protrude radially outward from tips of gear teeth of the modified gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) overlaps in a direction parallel to the tooth surface and can be brought into contact with the mating member (see FIG. 17). The movement in the direction parallel to the tooth surface during the elevating operation of the 330 can be suppressed.

  The deformed gear portion 354 is a portion that meshes with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), and has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted. A main body 354a to be formed, a receiving portion 354b formed on a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the main body 354a where the gear teeth are not formed, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (the right side of FIG. 16C) Adjacent gear teeth 354c adjacent to the end portion).

  The receiving portion 354b extends counterclockwise from the adjacent gear teeth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (the side where the first gear 351 bites into the adjacent gear portion 354c when the elevating body 330 is moved upward). ) Is formed at an arrangement angle of about two gear teeth (approximately 30 degrees to 50 degrees), and when the transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support portion 322, the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b is formed. And a tooth height of the adjacent gear tooth 354c between the curved wall portion 354b1 formed along the arc shape of the radius r formed by the first gear and the circumferential wall surface of the curved wall portion 354b1 and the adjacent gear tooth 354c. And a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed with a tooth height that is approximately half of the above (tooth length extending to a pitch circle C2 connecting the contact points of the meshing teeth). Accordingly, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side of the connection wall 354b2 has an overhang length that is approximately half the radial extension length of the opposite side surface of the connection wall portion 354b2 of the adjacent gear tooth 354c. The connecting wall 354b2 is formed integrally with the connecting wall 354b2 so as to protrude radially from the connecting wall 354b2.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, in a state where the transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support portion 322, the second gear 352 has a curved wall along an arc shape having a radius r formed by the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b. When the position where the portion 354b1 is arranged is set, the adjacent gear tooth 354c is arranged outside the circular arc having the radius r (on the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear tooth 354c has the radius r having the radius r). The formation at a position that does not interfere with the circle).

  Next, the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. Since the operation path of the ascending operation and the descending operation are common, the ascending operation will be described here, and the explanation of the descending operation will be omitted.

  17 to 20 are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 is illustrated in chronological order. Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the lowered position. In FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 19 illustrates a state in which the distance-up operation has been performed and the circumferential end of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 has started to mesh with the adjacent gear tooth 354c of the second gear 352. In FIG. 19, the state illustrated in FIG. The state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise in front view and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in front view, and the contact between the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c is released. FIG. 20 illustrates a state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount in a front view from the state illustrated in FIG. 19.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down by the driving force of the driving motor 341 (see FIG. 14) being transmitted to the rack 332 via the driving gear 342 and the transmission device 350. You. More specifically, the driving force of the drive gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the drive gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351. The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to a rack meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, whereby the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

  17, the slide shaft 322a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the rear cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 17, the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351 c of the first gear 351 and the locking portion 324 on the lower side of the back cover 320 abut, so that the first gear 351 is formed. Is mechanically prevented from rotating in a clockwise direction (a direction in which the rack 332 is moved down) in a front view.

  Accordingly, even if the drive gear 342 is over-rotated due to poor control of the drive motor 341 or the like, a load is generated to rotate the first gear 351 further clockwise from the state shown in FIG. Since the rotation of the first gear 351 is mechanically prevented, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation in which the rack 332 moves down can be avoided, so that the slide shaft 322a (see FIG. 15) is pressed against the lower surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15), thereby preventing the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the process of elevating the elevating body 330, the circumferential end face of the contact portion 351 b whose circumferential tooth thickness is made larger than the other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear tooth 354 c. Therefore, the load (the load due to the weight of the elevating body 330) transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 can be received by the contact portion 351b having a greater strength than the other gear teeth. Therefore, the durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

  Since the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 extends to the pitch circle C1, and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 extends to the pitch circle C2, the contact portion 351b is connected in the state of FIG. It is brought close to the position where it rubs against the wall 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b can be brought into contact with the adjacent gear tooth 354c at a portion near the root of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.

  In addition, since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are connected to the connection wall 354b2 on one side in the circumferential direction, the strength against the load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the radially extending length of the side surface on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 is shortened, resistance to deformation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c in the direction perpendicular to the tooth height direction increases, and the connecting wall portion 354b2 increases. Since 354b2 is formed integrally with the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion that receives the force applied to the adjacent gear tooth 354c is increased. The resistance of the adjacent gear teeth 354c to deformation in the circumferential direction increases. Thus, it is possible to prevent the adjacent gear teeth 354c from being damaged when receiving the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in a state immediately after the lifting / lowering body 330 is arranged at the raised position, the arc-shaped tip of the contact portion 351b contacts the adjacent gear tooth 354c. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, the transmission of the driving force in the rotation direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. You.

  Therefore, the force for supporting the weight of the elevating body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351, and the elevating body 330 starts to move in the falling direction. It starts to rotate in the direction for lowering (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, since the abutment portion 351b is arranged in a range in the direction in which the adjacent gear tooth 354c rotates (inside the circle formed by the tip of the adjacent gear tooth 354c), the second gear When rotating 352, it is necessary to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

  Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the axial side of the first gear 351. Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  The axial component Fa is not in the direction in which the first gear 351 is rotatable, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (in a structure that does not expand and contract in the radial direction), the abutment portion is formed by the axial component Fa. It is difficult to push 351b out of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

  The circumferential component Fb is directed in the rotation direction of the first gear 351, but slides between the adjacent gear tooth 354 c and the contact portion 351 b because the adjacent gear tooth 354 c contacts the contact portion 351 b at a point. And the first gear 351 is hard to rotate, so it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the circumferential component Fb.

  Accordingly, since the abutting portion 351b is prevented from being pushed out of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the rotation of the second gear 352 is prevented, and the second gear 352 and the second gear 352 are prevented from rotating. The state of the elevating body 330 is maintained.

  The contact portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are both formed in an arc shape with a radius r around the first gear 351. As shown in FIG. Since the first gear 351 is abutted against the surface along the direction, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received using the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. Accordingly, even if the stop of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the ascending position, it is possible to prevent the first gear 351 from over-rotating, and to stop the drive motor 341. Can be prevented from affecting the operation mode of the elevating body 330.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates and stops until the locking arc 351c contacts the upper locking portion 324. Between FIG. 18 and FIG. 20, since the second gear 352 is rotated by the circumferential end face of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushing the side face of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the adjacent gear tooth The position 354c is aligned with the second gear 352, so that the state where the adjacent gear teeth 354c abut on the tooth tip surface of the abutment portion 351b in the state illustrated in FIG. 20 can be reliably formed.

  Since the elevating body 330 is located at the ascending position from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, rotation of the second gear 352 in the direction for moving the rack 332 upward (clockwise in FIG. 20) is restricted. Is done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate. Therefore, a state where the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be reliably formed.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in a state in which the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the second gear 352 has a curved wall portion 354b1 along an arc shape having a radius r formed by the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the circular arc having the radius r (on the second gear 352 side), only the first gear 351 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 19 (counterclockwise direction).

  At this time, since the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker than the other gear teeth (approximately two to three gear teeth), the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is gradually reduced. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops at the intermediate phase from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b at the contact position is the same. And the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted.

  Further, the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions can be restricted while the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is kept low. That is, even if the second gear 352 starts to rotate clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b abuts on the tooth tip surface of the abutment portion 351b, so that the direction of the load is described in detail below. The rotation of the second gear 352 is regulated in the same manner as when the set gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other. Therefore, the movement of the rack 332 in both the up and down directions in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position is restricted, so that it is possible to suppress the rattling of the elevating body 330. It is difficult to regulate both the upper and lower directions (particularly, the restriction in the ascending direction) with a conventional crank mechanism, and is first achieved by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in the present embodiment. Things.

  As described above, the shape of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 can prevent the rotation of the second gear 352 in a state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the ascending position. It is not necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a magnitude equal to or greater than its own weight in order to maintain the position at the ascending position, and it is possible to suppress energy consumption.

  Further, it is possible to maintain the elevating body 330 at the ascending position by using the dead point of the crank mechanism, but in this case, there is a problem that the crank mechanism becomes large in accordance with the moving distance of the elevating body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, the crank mechanism is not required, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352. Therefore, the size of the transmission portion can be reduced.

  A method of releasing the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, another member that interferes with the contact portion 351b in the rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the reverse direction is not provided. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first gear 351 in the direction of lowering the elevating body 330 (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) is allowed.

  When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19, and further rotated in the same direction, the restriction on the rotation direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact portion 351b is not rotated). The leading end surface is separated from the adjacent gear tooth 354c), and the elevating body 330 can move downward. That is, the rotation of the first gear 351 can release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352, and the first gear 351 can perform another operation to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

  Next, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 includes a drive side slide member 420 having an effect portion 422 a having a circular liquid crystal portion and performing an ascending / descending operation, and a member moving up and down following the drive side slide member 420. And a driven side slide member 430 provided with a third symbol display device 81. The drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are communicated with a common guide rod 451 and operate in the same direction. Is done.

  FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 includes a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-like members, a driving slide member 420 configured to be capable of vertically elevating and lowering, A driven slide member 430 disposed above the side slide member 420 and configured to be vertically operable, a drive device 440 for generating a driving force for the drive slide member 420 to move up and down, and generated by the drive device 440 A transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 for transmitting the generated driving force to the driving side slide member 420 and guiding the operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430, and lower end portions of the pair of base members 410 And a lower front plate member 460 connected to the drive side slide member 420 and the left side of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. And a cover member 470 which is disposed on the front side of the upper, and mainly includes a.

  The base member 410 includes a main body member 411 configured as a vertically long plate-like member, and a U-shaped concave portion that is disposed at positions vertically coincident with both upper and lower ends of the main body member 411 and that opens to the front. A guide rod supporting portion 412 configured and a member arranged inside (vertical to the other base member 410) of a vertical line drawn from the guide rod supporting portion 412 and extending to the front side of the main body member 411. A stopper 413, a first shaft support 414 projecting in a columnar shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the opposite side of the locking part 413 across a vertical line drawn from the guide rod support 412, A lowering restricting member 415 that is supported by the shaft supporting portion 414 and controls the lowering operation of the driving slide member 420, and is provided below the first shaft supporting portion 414 and protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411. A second shaft support 416, the elevation regulating member 417 for regulating the upward movement of the driven sliding member 430 while being axially supported on the second shaft support portion 416 mainly comprises a.

  The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450, and is formed with an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In the present embodiment, when the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, the front opening of the guide rod support 412 is closed, and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support 412.

  The locking portion 413 is a portion that vertically contacts the lower side surface of the fall prevention portion 435 of the driven slide member 430, and the driven slide member 430 further descends from the contact state. Regulate.

  The descent regulating member 415 and the ascent regulating member 417 are members that rotate in accordance with the elevating operation of the driving slide member 420 and have a role of regulating the movement of the driven slide member 430, which will be described in detail later.

  The drive-side slide member 420 is a member whose left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450, and is moved up and down by the slide operation of the rack 452.

  The driven slide member 430 does not have an independent driving device, and its left and right ends are slidably supported by the guide rods 451, and move up and down by following the lifting and lowering operation of the drive slide member 420. The driven-side slide member 430 includes a main body member 431 having the third symbol display device 81 and configured to be long in the left-right direction, function units 432 arranged at both ends in the left-right direction of the main body member 431, and the function unit. A guide hole 433 that is a hole that is bored in the vertical direction in 432 and through which a guide rod 451 is inserted; a hook-shaped portion 434 that extends upward and inclining in the left-right outward direction at the lower end of the functional portion 432; It mainly includes a fall prevention portion 435 extending to the rear side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the function portion 432 (on the side close to the other guide hole 433).

  The hook-shaped portion 434 is a portion that is hooked on the elevation regulating member 417. In a state in which the driven slide member 430 is located at the lowered position, the ascending restricting member 417 wraps around and engages with the engaging surface 434a, which is the upper surface of the hook-shaped portion 434 (see FIG. 29), so that the driven slide is performed. The member 430 can be prevented from operating in the ascending direction (for example, it can be prevented from bouncing due to the recoil of the fall). Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is inclined upward and the engaging claw portion 417e of the rising-restricting member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination, the engagement between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the rising-restricting member 417 causes the left-right direction. Wobble can also be suppressed.

  Note that the shape of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434 (outside the tip of the engagement claw 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the portion on the right side in FIG. 29)) is based on the movement locus of the engagement claw 417e. Also have a shape that fits down. Therefore, even in a state where the engaging claw 417e and the hook-shaped portion 434 are engaged with each other and a load is applied to each other, the rotation operation of the elevation restricting member 417 can be performed.

  The driving device 440 includes a driving motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a driving gear 442 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor.

  The transmission device 450 includes a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, and is slidably supported by the guide rod 451, and the drive side slide member 420 is fastened and fixed, and the drive gear 442. The rack mainly includes a rack 452 meshed from the inside (the inside of the pair of drive gears 442), and a vertically long plate-shaped contact wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the root of the rack 452 to the front side.

  The contact wall 453 has a role of rotating the elevation restriction member 417 to the release side and a role of receiving the urging force of the elevation restriction member 417 to move the rack 452 in a direction away from the drive gear 442, and details will be described later. I do.

  The lower front plate member 460 is bent in such a manner that the left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and the central portion is offset by a predetermined amount toward the back side compared to the left and right ends. A main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 formed in the left half of the main body member 461 along the left-right direction (in such a manner as to be inclined upward toward the outside), and extending above the main body member 461. And a cylindrical passage portion 463 whose upper end is opened to the front side.

  The guide hole 462 is a long hole through which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring housing member 423 is slidably guided.

  The tubular passage portion 463 is a tubular member through which a ball can pass, and in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 31), the second passage formation of the drive side slide member 420 is performed. It is a member through which a ball flowing down through the member 422 passes.

  The detailed configuration of the driving slide member 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive side slide member 420.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disk having a main body member 421 configured as a plate member elongated in the left-right direction and a rendering unit 422 a configured of a circular liquid crystal. portion and the second passage forming member 422 which groove ball can pass in front view leftward from the disc portion while being fastened from the front side in the center of the body member 421 is extended, the second copies passage thereof the wiring housing member 423 having one end portion in a front view the left lower portion of the forming member 422 and the other end is supported is supported in the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460, the second copies path forming member 422 mainly the connecting member 424 acts as a portion for introducing the balls into the groove 422b of the second copies path forming member 422 has a passage extending through along the circumferential direction of the shaft while being axially supported, to include.

  The main body member 421 is open to the front side at a guide portion 421a that forms a part of a cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and at a portion that extends leftward from the center portion when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a groove 421b that is disposed to be inclined downward to the left in a manner, and a discharge opening 421c that is formed at the lower left end of the groove 421b and that is larger than the diameter of the sphere in the front-rear direction. .

  The guide portion 421a is a groove portion having an arcuate cross-section that is open to the back side and extends in the vertical direction. The open portion is closed by a rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450, so that the guide rod is provided. 451 (see FIG. 22) is formed.

  The groove 421b is a member that forms a ball passage in cooperation with the second passage forming member 422. The ball that has flowed down along the groove 421b is discharged to the back side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421c. You.

  The second passage forming member 422 includes a rendering portion 422a formed of a circular liquid crystal, a shaft support portion 422b protruding in a cylindrical shape from the disk portion disposed on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the rear side, A sensor member 422c disposed below the shaft support portion 422b to detect the passage of a ball, and a groove that is opened to the rear side with a width that allows the ball that has passed through the sensor member 422c to flow down. A groove 422d having the same shape, a guide 422e forming a cylindrical portion into which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and a shape capable of accommodating the connection member 424 between the shaft support 422b and the sensor member 422c. And a housing concave portion 422f that is concavely provided with the above.

  The shaft support 422b is a portion where the connection member 424 is supported. In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed at the connection position, the sphere flowing down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c via the connecting member 424, and then passes through the passage formed by the grooves 422d and 421b. I do.

  The wire housing member 423 is a member that houses a wire that is extended from the lower front member 460 and the like and that is connected to the rendering part 422a and the like, and that is supported by the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 in front view. It mainly includes a main body portion 423a that is a rod-shaped portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a cylindrical slide shaft 423b that protrudes rearward from a lower end portion of the main body portion 423a.

  The main body portion 423a is a member that accommodates wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and is configured to have a curved shape that is convex in a direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. You. Thereby, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape near the position of the pivotal support with the second passage forming member 422, and the wiring can be prevented from being bent and disconnected.

  The slide shaft 423b is a rod-shaped portion inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

  Next, the configuration of the connection member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member 424, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member 424 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26A, and FIG. FIG. 27 is a rear view of the connection member 424 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the connecting member 424 has a cylindrical portion 424a which is formed in a cylindrical shape and is supported by the shaft supporting portion 422b, and extends in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 424a. A plate-shaped upper wall portion 424b to be provided, and a curved plate-shaped lower wall portion 424c arranged to face the upper wall portion 424b at a distance equal to or longer than the diameter of the sphere below the upper wall portion 424b in a front view. And a connection cover 424d for connecting the rear side end portions of the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c and being covered between the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c, and a connection wound around the cylindrical portion 424a. And a torsion spring 424e for applying a downward (counterclockwise in FIG. 25B) urging force to the member 424.

  The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases as it approaches the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a from the radial end of the cylindrical portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. It is a plate-shaped part.

  The lower wall portion 424c is a plate-shaped portion curved and formed along an arc centered on the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and has a space between the upper wall portion 424b and the upper wall portion 424b. Will be arranged.

  The connection cover 424d is a plate member that suppresses the sphere passing through the connection member 424 from spilling to the rear side. The opening of the connecting member 424 on the opposite side (front side) of the connection cover 424d is closed by the bottom of the housing recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 abutting from the front side. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from spilling from the open portion of the connection member 424.

  The operation of the connection member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. Note that FIG. 27 illustrates a downwardly inclined state in which the opening formed by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 faces in the left-right direction. In FIG. FIG. 27 shows an upwardly inclined state in which the opening formed by the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the member 424 is directed obliquely upward. FIG. 27 corresponds to a separated state described later (see FIG. 41), and FIG. This corresponds to a communication state described later (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connection member 424 is rotatable around the shaft support 422 b in a state of being housed in the housing recess 422 f of the second passage forming member 422, and The front side end surfaces of the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c are in contact with the bottom of the housing recess 422f.

  The accommodation recess 422f is formed in a circular arc shape centered on the shaft supporting portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower wall portion 424c at a portion opposed to the lower wall portion 424c in the state shown in FIG. The curved wall portion 422f1 and a surface opposed to the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1 and smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in an upwardly inclined state (see FIG. 42). And a facing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface to be formed.

  Since the curved wall portion 422f1 is radially contacted with the lower wall portion 424c in the downwardly inclined state of the connection member 424, the displacement of the connection member 424 in the axial direction can be suppressed.

  Therefore, even if the fitting between the shaft supporting portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened (a state where the gap is large, for example, a state where the dimension has a gap between 0.5 mm and 1 mm), the connecting member When the 424 is in the downward inclined state, the posture of the connection member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.

  On the other hand, when the fitting between the shaft supporting portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened, the operating resistance generated in the shaft supporting portion is reduced, so that the connection is performed unless a load from other members occurs. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downwardly inclined state by the action of gravity and the urging force of the torsion spring 424e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the connection member 424 is maintained in the upwardly inclined state even when no load is generated from another member.

  The opposing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the ball from the connection member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In the present embodiment, the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c by bending the surface facing the curved wall portion 422f1.

  The upward inclined state is formed in a communication state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connection member 424 communicate with each other. In this state, since the lower wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball that has rolled and passed through the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1 and the sensor member 422c After passing through the opening, it flows down the groove 422d.

  On the other hand, the downward inclined state is formed in a separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connecting member 424 are separated. In this state, the lower wall portion 424c extends to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower wall portion 422c and the wall surface of the housing recess 422f disposed opposite to the lower end portion (sensor member 422c). Is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, the sphere is prevented from passing through the connection member 424 (the sphere is discharged from the lower end).

  Therefore, as described later, even if the ball reaches the connecting member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the ball can be stopped by the connecting member 424.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. 33, a description will be given of the elevating operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430. First, the positional relationship among the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 29 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXX in FIG. FIGS. 29 and 30 show a state in which the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged at the lowered position, and the illustration of a pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. The transmission member 450 is made visible. Further, in FIG. 29, the lowering-down regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged, and the rack immediately before the contact wall 453 and the release convex portion 417c of the ascending regulating member 417 abut. The outline of 452 is shown in phantom.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven side slide member 430, in the lowered position, the fall prevention portion 435 is brought into contact with the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from below, and the hook-shaped portion 434 is raised. It comes into contact with the regulating member 417 from above. As described above, since the driven slide member 430 is configured to be restricted from moving in both the up and down directions, it is possible to suppress the driven slide member 430 from rattling in the vertical position at the lowered position.

  In addition, a lift regulating member 417 and a locking portion 413 are provided with a guide rod 451 inserted through the guide hole 433 therebetween, and these can be brought into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven side slide member 430, so that the function is improved. The portion 432 can be prevented from rattling in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even when a disturbance occurs in the driven-side slide member 430, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player at the moment when the driven-side slide member 430 is placed at the lowered position, the driven-side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Further, since the vertical position of the elevation restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are displaced from each other, the functional portion 432 rattles in an oblique direction (for example, a direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the upward restricting member 417). Can be suppressed. Therefore, even when a disturbance occurs in the driven slide member 430 at the moment when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit at the lowered position, the driven slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Note that, since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the elevation regulating member 417, the locking portion 413 is disposed at a position far from the driving slide member 420, and the locking portion 413 is The lifting operation of the member 420 can be hardly hindered. Accordingly, the degree of freedom in designing the drive side slide member 420 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the descending regulating member 415 is disposed in front of the rising regulating member 417, and the height at which the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450 is formed (the length of the rack 452 extending from the vicinity of the tooth root). Is set to a height short of reaching the descent control member 415, so that the descent control member 415 and the contact wall 453 do not abut in the rotation direction of the descent control member 415. Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the up-and-down regulating member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 and the down-regulating member 415 do not abut in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a protruding plate 453a that protrudes from the upper end of the contact wall 453 to the front side, and the protruding plate 453a can be brought into contact with the descent restricting member 415 in the rotation direction.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. Note that FIG. 31 illustrates a state in which the driving-side slide member 420 is moved up from the lowered position and is disposed at the connection position, and a pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 are not illustrated. In FIG. 31, the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged.

  In a state where the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the connection position, a ball can be introduced into the connection member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 31, the rising restriction member 417 is a member that covers the hook-shaped portion 434 from above before the upper end of the contact wall 453 comes into contact with the rising restriction member 417, Rotation can be performed between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the released state shown in FIG. Note that the release state is not limited to the state in FIG. 31, but refers to a state in which the elevation restriction member 417 has been rotated from vertically above the hook-shaped portion 434 to a position where the elevation restriction member 417 is retracted.

  The elevation regulating member 417 includes a cylindrical portion 417a pivotally supported by the second shaft support portion 416, an extension plate 417b extending linearly in a tangential direction of the cylinder portion 417a, and one of the extension plates 417b. A release projection 417c vertically projecting from the end (lower end), an engagement projection 417d vertically projecting from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and the engagement projection At the protruding end of the hook-shaped portion 417d, the hook-shaped portion 434 extends in parallel with the extending direction of the hook-shaped portion 434 in an engaged state, and is disposed above and inside (upper left of the enlarged view in FIG. 29) the tip end of the hook-shaped portion 434. A dovetail portion 417e, a separation inclined portion 417f which is inclined downward on the upper side surface of the projecting end of the engaging projection 417d, and one end is wound around the cylindrical portion 417a and one end is formed on the main body member 411 of the base member 410. How to wind up the rise regulating member 417 by being locked Mainly includes a spring 417g torsion biasing (Figure 29 enlarged view counterclockwise direction), the.

  The extension plate 417b extends above the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. Thus, when the release protrusion 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved in a direction away from the driven slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

  In the engaged state, the engagement claw 417e engages with the hook 434 even when the driven slide member 430 moves upward (the engagement claw between the hook 434 and the functional portion 432). The movement of the driven slide member 430 is strongly suppressed by the entry of the driven member 417e).

  The release operation of the elevation restriction member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the release convex portion 417c, while the rising regulating member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. When the rack 452 is raised from this state to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end of the contact wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, so that the lift restricting member 417 is wound in the outer winding direction (the clockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 31). ), And the engaging projection 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).

  That is, the releasing operation of the lifting restriction member 417 can be performed only by the lifting operation of the rack 452. Therefore, for example, as compared with a case where a solenoid member for releasing the lifting restriction member 417 is separately provided, a drive device for releasing the lifting restriction member 417 is also used by the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22). And the number of drive devices provided can be reduced (product cost can be reduced). In addition, it is possible to suppress the careless operation of the elevation restriction member 417.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the elevation regulating member 417 is operated in accordance with the arrangement of the rack 452, compared with the case where the elevation regulating member 417 is operated by another drive source (such as a solenoid), The operation timing of the rack 452 and the elevation regulating member 417 does not coincide with each other, thereby preventing an operation failure. When the driven slide member 430 moves upward, the elevation regulating member 417 is reliably shifted to the release state. Can be done. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being lifted while the lift restricting member 417 is in the engaged state, so that an excessive load is applied to the hook-shaped portion 434 and the engaging convex portion 417d of the lift restricting member 417.

  Further, the rack 452 is raised, and the lift restricting member 417 is shifted to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 comes into contact with the lower end of the driven slide member 430, so that the rack 452 continues the lift operation. By itself, when the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 are separated from each other, an engaged state (see FIG. 29) is formed to prevent the driven slide member 430 from rattling while the driven slide member 430 is separated from the driven slide member 430. When the member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, a release state (see FIG. 31) is configured, and the driving force required for raising the driven side slide member 430 can be suppressed.

  Here, in the case where the driving slide member 420 pushes up the driven slide member 430 during the ascent operation of the drive slide member 420 as in the present embodiment, the disengagement between the driven slide member 430 and the engaging portion is performed. Can be performed by an operation of pushing up the driven side slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to make the engagement state enough to be released by the pushing up force of the driven side slide member 430, and it is difficult to firmly engage. It becomes. In addition, in this case, there is a problem that the driven slide member 430 vibrates due to a reaction generated when the driven slide member 430 and the engaging portion are released, and the posture becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engagement is released by rotating the elevation regulating member 417 and retracting the elevation regulating member 417 from above the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven slide member 430. The force that can be applied to the driven-side slide member 430 and the force that causes the ascending regulating member 417 to rotate can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force for suppressing the ascending operation of the driven slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force required for the release.

  Further, since the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 do not come into contact with each other when performing the release operation of the elevation restriction member 417, it is difficult for the driven side slide member 430 to recoil, and the driven side slide member 430 at the time of the release is released. Posture can be stabilized.

  In the connection state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive side slide member 420 and the cylindrical passage 463 of the lower front plate member 460 are communicated. Thus, the ball flowing down the second passage forming member 422 can be discharged to the cylindrical passage 463.

  32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. FIG. Note that FIG. 32 illustrates a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 moves upward from the state illustrated in FIG. 31 and the protruding plate 453a of the transmission device 450 comes into contact with the lowering regulating member 415, and FIG. 32 shows a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 32, and the raised plate 453a is disposed at the raised position on the upper side of the lowering regulating member 415. Further, in FIG. 33, the vicinity of the lowering regulating member 415 is partially enlarged.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417c of the elevation restriction member 417 is in contact with the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 is disposed symmetrically, and the direction in which the release convex portion 417c contacts the contact wall 453 is also symmetrical. Therefore, the release convex portion 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive side slide member 420, and it is possible to suppress the drive side slide member 420 from rattling in the left-right direction during the elevating operation.

  Since the lift restricting member 417 is urged in the left and right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 by the torsion spring 417g, the load in the left and right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c. Can be hung. Accordingly, the driving slide member 420 is urged in a constant direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the driving slide member 420 during the elevating operation can be stabilized.

  Further, when the driving slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied to the contact wall 453 from the release projection 417c returns the pair of left and right driving slide members 420 to the center position. The ascending restriction member 417 is left-right asymmetric.

  That is, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves in the direction approaching the release projection 417c, the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased and the urging force is increased by further rotating the lift regulating member 417 to the release side. While the force for pushing back the contact wall 453 increases, the torsion spring 417g is rotated by the ascending restricting member 417 rotating in the direction opposite to the release side on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release projection 417c. Is reduced, the urging force is reduced, and the force for pushing the contact wall 453 is reduced. This can suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.

  Since the drive gear 442 and the lift regulating member 417 are disposed on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the urging force of the torsion spring 417g acts in a direction to separate the rack 452 from the drive gear 442, so that the drive side slide member 420 The rack 452 and the drive gear 442 approach each other in the left-right direction, so that an increase in drive resistance can be suppressed (the spacing between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 rattles in the left and right direction and the rack 452 moves in the direction approaching the drive gear 442, the lift regulating member 417 is wound outward (the engagement convex portion 417 d is formed on the left and right outer sides of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400). In this case, the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g increases, and the urging force increases, so that the urging force for pushing back the driving slide member 420 increases, while the rack 452 drives. When moving in a direction away from the gear 442, the guide rod 451 supports the rack 452, so that the rack 452 separates from the drive gear 442 more than a gap provided in the support structure between the guide rod 451 and the rack 452. Is regulated. Thereby, the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is reduced, and it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the meshing resistance. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in a state where the driving slide member 420 and the driven slide member 430 are arranged at the raised position, the lower surface of the projection plate 453 a of the transmission device 450 is formed by the release projection 415 c of the lowering regulation member 415. Contact the upper surface (locked state).

  The protruding plate 453a has an inclined side surface 453a1 on the lower surface, which is inclined upward toward the left and right sides.

  The descending inclined member 415 includes a cylindrical portion 415a pivotally supported by the first shaft support portion 414, an extended plate 415b extending linearly in a tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and one of the extended plates 415b. A release protrusion 415c vertically projecting from an end (upper end) and having a semicircular tip is formed, and one end is connected to the main body member 411 of the base member 410 by being wound around the cylindrical portion 415a. And a torsion spring 415d for urging the descending regulating member 415 in the inner winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) by being stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering restriction member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held at the raised position, and the power consumption of the drive motor 441 can be reduced.

  In addition, the rotation of the descent restricting member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed by the rack 452 being raised and the protruding plate 453a getting over the release convex portion 415c of the descent restricting member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the lowering restriction member 415 can be generated by the driving motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can be used as well, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Returning to FIG. 30, a description will be given of the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the descending regulation member 415, the elevation regulation member 417, and the contact wall 453. As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering regulating member 415 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 30) as compared with the raising regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 can abut on the rising regulating member 417 in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. And the rear side surface of the descending regulating member 415 can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the contact wall 453.

  Returning to FIG. The descending regulation member 415 and the contact wall 453 are contacted in the front-back direction. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the contact wall 453 and the elevation restriction member 417 are in contact in the left-right direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 33), and the contact wall 453 and the downward regulation member 415 are in the front-rear direction (see FIG. (Vertical direction). Thereby, the rattling of the drive side slide member 420 in the left-right direction can be suppressed by the rising regulating member 417, and the longitudinal direction (the direction parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the driving gear 442) can be reduced by the descending regulating member 415. The rattling can be suppressed.

  Therefore, the relative movement of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 in a direction parallel to the tooth surface can prevent the area of the meshing surface from decreasing, and can cause the rack 452 to fall forward in a state where the rack 452 is arranged at the raised position. Can be prevented.

  When the rack 452 descends by rotating the drive gear 442 in a direction to lower the rack 452 from the state shown in FIG. 33, the protruding plate 453a applies a load to the release convex portion 415c, and the descent regulating member 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 33). Thus, the locking by the descending regulating member 415 is released, and the driving slide member 420 can be moved downward. That is, the locking by the lowering regulating member 415 can be released by the driving force of the driving motor 441 (the driving source can be used as well), so that the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the locking of the lowering control member 415 is released by the lowering operation of the drive side slide member 420, the operation timing is shifted and the lowering control is performed as in the case of rotating the lowering control member 415 by another driving source. The drive-side slide member 420 is lowered before the restriction of the member 415 is released, so that it is possible to prevent an overload from being generated in the drive source and the lowering restriction member 415.

  In the structure in which both the driving slide member 420 and the driven slide member 430 are maintained at the raised position in the raised position as in the present embodiment, the locking of each member at the raised position is performed by the driven slide member 430. However, in this case, the structure for connecting and separating the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 is complicated, and the cost is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the driven slide member 430 is maintained at the raised position by locking the drive slide member 420, the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 are maintained at the raised position. Therefore, the number of components required can be reduced (only the driving device 450 and the driving-side slide member 420 can be used). In addition, the interlocking of the driven side slide member 430 with the drive side slide member 420 is performed solely by the action of gravity, so that the structure between the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 can be simplified. it can.

  When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven slide member 430 moves down on the rack 452, but, for example, the guide rod 451 becomes dirty, and the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. 22). ), The descending speed of the driven slide member 430 may be lower than the descending speed of the rack 452. Also in this case, when the driven side slide member 430 contacts the elevation restriction member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 acts on the separation inclined portion 417f of the elevation restriction member 417, and the elevation restriction member 417 can be rotated. By the weight of the driven slide member 430, the lift regulating member 417 and the hook 434 can be engaged with each other.

  Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swing unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the second variable winning device 82 a and the second specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13, and plays a ball that has won the second specific winning opening 82. A passage for passage is provided inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b that detects that a ball has passed is disposed between the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning opening 82. Note that the sensor member 82b is a part of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

  FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swing unit 500 is configured to hang the first passage forming member 520 downward and to the right in front view, and is a unit that performs an effect by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 forming a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 pivotally supported by the base member 510, and a base. A driving device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 to generate a driving force of the first passage forming member 520, a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520, and is covered on the front side. And a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and is connected to the second specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13.

  The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 formed of an L-shaped plate in a front view, a shaft support hole 512 formed in the front end of the main body member at a right end in a front view in a circular shape in the front-rear direction, A first wall portion 513 which is disposed vertically above the hole 512 and has a flat plate shape whose surface is directed in the front-rear direction, and one or more spheres leftward from the lower left end of the first wall portion 513 in a front view A second wall portion 514 which is disposed at an interval and has a curved plate shape whose surface faces in the left-right direction, and a sphere which is disposed on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514 is A flow-down passage 515 that flows down, a shaft support portion 516 that is disposed at the lower left of the shaft support hole 512 in a front view and that is protruded in a columnar shape on the front side, and a lock that is provided around the axis of the shaft support portion 516. A wall portion 517 and a detection sensor 518 disposed above the shaft support portion 516 for detecting the phase of the transmission device. To prepare for.

  The shaft support hole 512 is a hole into which the shaft support portion 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted, and the first passage forming member 520 swings around the shaft support hole 512.

  The first wall portion 513 includes a pair of guide wall portions 513a extending from both ends in the left-right direction to the front side.

  The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc-shaped wall portion 517 a having an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517 b extending to the lower right in front view. .

  The arc wall 517 a is an end face of the detection sensor 518 and extends to a circumferential end face of the shaft support 516.

  The first passage forming member 520 includes a long rod-shaped distribution base member 521, which is a member supported by the shaft support hole 512, and a distribution base member 521 disposed on the front side of the distribution base member 521. And a passage cover member 522 that is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which the sphere can flow down with the distribution base member 521.

  The distribution base member 521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a that constitutes one side of a ball flow-down passage, and one ball extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b disposed at a position separated by a minute gap V1, and a shaft support portion 521c protruding in a columnar shape on the back side near the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and inserted through the shaft support hole 512. A long hole 521d formed in a plate-like portion extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c along the extending direction, and a rear side from an end of the intermediate plate portion 521b on the side of the hanging plate portion 521a. And a distribution convex portion 521e configured in such a manner that the width is reduced toward the outside in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c, and the gap V1 is formed along the left side surface of the distribution convex portion 521e when viewed from the rear. The upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a extended to the front side Mainly and a curved wall portion 521f which is curved along the arc shape having a center.

  The hanging plate portion 521a has a shape in which the lower portion from the middle portion is bent downward from the middle portion as compared with the upper portion, and a ball feeding portion in which the front-side plate thickness portion is cut and thinned at the lower end portion. 521a1.

  The gap V1 is a space that allows a sphere reaching the right side of the distribution convex portion 521e in a front view to pass in the front direction.

  The passage cover member 522 has a plate-like plate-shaped portion 522a covered on the front side of the distribution base member 521, and extends in a plate-like shape from both ends in the short direction of the plate-shaped portion 522a toward the back side. And upper and lower wall portions 522b.

  The plate-like portion 522a is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and has a ball receiving portion 522a1 that is bent rearward at a portion of the lower end portion that is disposed on the front side of the ball feed portion 521a1 of the distribution base member 521. Prepare.

  The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions that roll the sphere that has passed through the gap V1, and since the inclination angle changes at the middle portion as in the case of the hanging plate portion 521a, the falling speed of the sphere can be changed at the middle portion. it can.

  In the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b, a step is provided inside the front end portion. The step has a role of displacing the rolling sphere in a direction facing the upper and lower wall portions 522b (a direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion) to decelerate the sphere.

  In addition, the sphere that has reached the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the back side by the sphere feeding part 521a1 and the sphere receiving part 522a1. Thereby, the speed of the ball before discharge can be reduced, and the discharge of the ball can be stabilized.

  The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft of the drive motor 531. The drive gear 532 meshes with the main body gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

  The transmission device 540 includes a main body gear portion 541 that is supported by the shaft support portion 516 and meshes with the drive gear 532, and a first passage forming member that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the eccentric position of the main body gear portion 541 to the front side. The eccentric convex portion 542 inserted into the long hole 521 d of the 520 is configured to extend in the radial direction from the main body gear portion 541 so as to be in contact with the locking wall portion 517, and can pass through the gap of the detection sensor 518. And an extension portion 543 that extends.

  The cover member 550 is connected to the second specific winning opening 82 at the right end in front view of the plate-shaped main body member 551 which is covered by the base member 510, and the rear end is the first end. A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 abutting on the wall portion 513, and a pair of guide wall portions 553 extending downward from the left and right ends of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the rear side surface of the main body member 551. Prepare mainly.

  The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The sphere that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 flows downward between the guide wall portions 513a and 553.

  The swing operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40 are front views of the swing operation unit 500. FIG. 38 to 40, the cover member 550 is not shown, and the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 when viewed in cross section at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is shown. The external shape is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In FIG. 38, the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position is shown. In FIG. 39A, the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. In a state in which the split convex portion 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a, in FIG. 39B, the first passage forming member 520 swings by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. 39A. FIG. 40 illustrates a state immediately before contacting the connection member 424, and FIG. 40 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. You.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 occurs when the transmission device 540 is rotated and the position of the long hole 521d is moved with the movement of the eccentric convex part 542.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, a direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric convex 542 and a direction X2 that coincides with the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly. I do. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, so that the load for rotating the transmission device 540 can be suppressed. Thus, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the driving gear 532, and the power consumption of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  In the release position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is disposed in the gap between the detection sensors 518 and abuts against the end of the arc wall portion 517a. That is, the extending portion 543 has both a role as a portion used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a detent member.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the base member 510 in a front view. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the left side in front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and is discharged to the outside of the game area through the downflow passage 515. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (a), at an intermediate position between the release position and the connection position, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide walls 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (stays on the distal end portion of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).

  As shown in FIG. 39B, in a state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 contacts the connection member 424, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (while the ball is still on the distal end portion of the distribution convex portion 521e, stay). Thereby, in the state of FIG. 39B, the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520, is sent to the connecting member 424, and is prevented from reaching the opposing wall portion 422f2.

  Here, the opposing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in the upper inclined state (see FIG. 42), so that the upper end portion is connected to the connecting member 424 in the lower inclined state (see FIG. 41). From the lower end of the upper side wall 424b. Therefore, when the ball is sent to the connecting member 424 in the downwardly inclined state and the ball collides with the upper end of the opposing wall 422f2, the opposing wall 422f2 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39B, the introduction of the sphere into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, so that the sphere can be prevented from colliding with the opposing wall portion 422f2, Damage to the opposing wall 422f2 can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 40, at the connection position, a direction X1 that connects the shaft support 516 and the eccentric convex 542 and a direction X2 that matches the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly. I do. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, so that the load for rotating the transmission device 540 can be suppressed. Thus, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the driving gear 532, and the power consumption of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  Further, at the connection position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is brought into contact with the inclined wall portion 517b. Accordingly, the phase in which the transmission device 540 is stopped by abutting the extension portion 543 against the inclined wall portion 517b is stabilized, and the extension portion is compared with a case where a load is locally applied to the extension portion 543. 543 can be improved in durability.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is sorted by the distribution convex portion 521e into a path on the right side in front view, and moves to the front side through the gap V1. From the upper and lower walls 522b of the passage cover member 522 (see FIG. 37).

  The flow of the sphere in the connected state will be described. First, the ball that has won the second specific winning opening 82 from the game area through the second variable winning device 82a moves back and forth toward the back side through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 (see FIG. 36), and the first wall portion. When it comes into contact with 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide walls 513 a, 553, moves back and forth toward the front side through the gap V <b> 1 of the first passage forming member 520, and the upper and lower walls of the passage cover member 522. Roll on the lower wall of 522b.

  That is, before the ball flows down inside the first passage forming member 520, the ball is sent in the front-rear direction. For this reason, even if the balls are supplied to the second specific winning opening 82 in a daisy chain, the balls can be prevented from jumping and the like and can smoothly flow into the first passage forming member 520. Also, by causing the ball sent in the front-rear direction to flow down along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), the direction of the speed of the ball can be changed, and the ball smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520. Can be done.

  In the first passage forming member 520, the direction in which the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend is changed around the middle part. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the middle portion to the base end side (the shaft support portion 521c side), and extend from the middle portion to the front end side (opposite the base end side). Up to a straight line Y2 inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

  Therefore, the speed of the ball rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower during a period from the base end to the intermediate portion than in a direction from the middle to the distal end. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

  Further, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is formed in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the direction in which the ball is thrown from the first passage forming member 520 at the connection position (see FIG. 42). The angle with the direction (vertical direction) in which the sphere is introduced into the sensor member 422c can be reduced. Thereby, the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the rotation of the transmission device 540 causes the first passage forming member 520 to swing, and the arrangement of the distribution convex portion 521e switches the path through which the ball flows down.

  Here, in the case where a wall member is disposed so as to face the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the distribution convex portion 521e approaches the wall member to a diameter of the sphere or less. When the configuration is adopted, when the ball stays in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the ball may be caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, and a malfunction may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position illustrated in FIG. 40, an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution convex portion 521 e and the second wall portion 514, and the distribution convex portion is formed. No wall member is arranged on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 across the 521e, and the second wall portion 514 is opened. Therefore, a situation in which the ball is bitten in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and malfunction can be prevented.

  With reference to FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, connection of the flow path between the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 will be described. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500. In FIGS. 41 and 42, the second passage forming member 422 is viewed in cross section and the connection member 424 is visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The distribution convex portion 521e shown in the drawing is visible.

  FIGS. 41 and 42 show a state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 31). In FIG. 41, the left swing unit 500 is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 38). FIG. 42 illustrates a state in which the left swing unit 500 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 40).

  When the first passage forming member 520 swings from the state illustrated in FIG. 41 to the state illustrated in FIG. 42, the distal end thereof abuts on the lower side surface of the upper side wall 424 b of the connecting member 424, and the connecting member 424 is moved. Rock it. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, even if the stop position of the drive side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from an ideal position, for example, the first The formation of a gap between the tip of the passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 can be suppressed. This suppresses the ball from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424, and stabilizes the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. Can be.

  By swinging the connecting member 424, the lower wall portion 424c on which the ball flowing down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in a direction approaching the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be reduced, and the ball is prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. Therefore, the throwing of the ball can be stabilized.

  In the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower wall portion 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicating with the groove portion 422d (see FIG. 27). Thus, the ball can be rolled along the downward inclination, and the ball can be stably sent to the second passage forming member 422.

  Note that the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting passage of a sphere of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) or the sensor member 422c. For example, in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connection position shown in FIG. 42, the detected numbers of spheres of the sensor members 82b and 422c match (the sphere remains in the first passage forming member 520). The swinging of the first passage forming member 520 toward the release position (see FIG. 41) at the timing prevents the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 to the outside of the game area. can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the ball is distributed by the movement of the distribution convex portion 521e, and the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 are brought into contact with each other by swinging the first passage forming member 520. The driving force required for the operation of forming the flow path of the sphere by contact is also used (provided by the driving force of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) for operating the first passage forming member 520). Since the states are synchronized, for example, a situation in which a ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 to the outside of the game area.

  Further, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at the upper end of the distribution base member 521, and partitions (forms the upper end) a wall of a sphere that flows down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36). Doubles. Thus, the cost of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where sorting is performed by other parts, and the balls distributed to the first passage forming member 520 side can be surely separated from the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member. 522.

  Next, the rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a front view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600. FIG. 45 is a front view of the rotary unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotary unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotating unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in a container shape having one open side, a guide member 620 covered on one side of the case member 610, A driving mechanism 630 disposed between the member 610 and the guide member 620, a rotating member 640 rotationally driven by the driving force of the driving mechanism 630, and a pitch disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. It mainly comprises a device 650 and a guide member 680 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640.

  The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front. It is formed in a container shape with an open side. The guide member 620 is formed in the shape of an annular disk in a front view, and is disposed (fixed) at the standing end of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. Thus, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the internal space.

  The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotating member 640 so as to be displaceable, and has a connecting link operation groove 621 and an undulating link operation groove 622 formed in the front thereof. The connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section that extend along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link of the rotating member 640 described later. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are inserted respectively.

  Note that the groove widths of the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulation link operation groove 622 are set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameters of the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644 a and 648 a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link operating groove 621 and the undulating link operating groove 622.

  When the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, the connecting link action groove 621 acts on the connecting link member 644 to increase or decrease the interval between the divided members DV (see FIG. 73), while the undulating link action groove 622 is Acting on the undulating link member 648, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are undulated (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulating link operation groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 49 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 in a state where the rotating member 640, a part of the pitching device 650 and the guide member 680 have been removed, and FIG. 50 is a schematic front view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. The two-dot chain line is shown as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each of the action grooves 621 and 622.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link action groove 621 has a large-diameter portion 621a curved in an arc with a radius R1 about the axis O, and an arc-shaped curve with a radius R2 about the axis O. And a pair of connecting portions 621c connecting between the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to be larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).

  The undulating link action groove 622 includes a large-diameter portion 622a curved in an arc with a radius R3 about the axis O, a small-diameter portion 622b curved in an arc with a radius R4 about the axis O, and a large-diameter portion. 622a and a pair of connecting portions 622c connecting between the small diameter portion 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to be larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).

  In the present embodiment, the large-diameter portion 621a and the small-diameter portion 621b of the connecting link action groove 621 and the large-diameter portion 622a and the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged concentrically about the axis O. In this case, the axis O coincides with the center of rotation when the rotating member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the large diameter portions 621a and 622a and the small diameter portions 622a and 622b of the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulation link operation groove 622 act on the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648, respectively. The output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced by suppressing the force.

  In addition, the pair of connection portions 621c of the connection link action groove 621 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase. Similarly, the pair of connecting portions 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase. Therefore, when the rotation member 640 is driven to rotate, the force applied to the connection link member 644 from one connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the force applied to the connection link member 644 from the other connection portion 621c. And can be offset. Similarly, the force applied to the undulating link member 648 from one connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 and the force applied to the undulating link member 648 from the other connecting portion 622c can be offset. Accordingly, the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. .

  In this embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are formed to have different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 becomes the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter of the undulation link operation groove 622. When the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is inserted into one of the portions 622b and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the connecting link 644a. It is inserted into one of the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b of the action groove 621.

  Since the connecting portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the interval between the divided members DV or displacing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, they receive a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portions 621c and 622c. By preventing 644a and 648a from being simultaneously inserted into connecting portions 621c and 622c, necessary driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the driving mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for rotatingly driving the rotating member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a first gear (first transmission gear) attached to the pinion gear 632. 633a), a central transmission body 634 having a gear 634a meshed with the last gear (second transmission gear 633b) of the transmission gear train, and a gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The first gear (first distribution gears 635a, 636a) meshes with the first and second distribution gear trains, and the last gear (third distribution gear train) of the one-side distribution gear train and the other gear train. It mainly includes one-side rotation drive member 637 and other-side rotation drive member 638 having gears 637a, 638a meshed with gears 635c, 636c). The second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

  The one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are members that are the end of the transmission path for transmitting the rotation driving force generated from the driving motor 631 (the output end of the driving mechanism 630). The rotating member 640 is rotated by the rotation of the rotating member 640 itself. Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 51A is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51B is a diagram illustrating the one-side rotation member 637 and the other in the LIb-LIb line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the side rotation member 638.

  Since the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members formed in the same shape as each other, only the one-side rotation drive member 637 will be described, and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described. Only the reference numerals are given in the diagram of FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation driving member 637 is formed in a disk shape, and the engaging portions 637b are recessed at a plurality of positions (three positions in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer edge thereof. It is formed.

  The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and has a width (a distance between opposing surfaces) from the open side to the concave notch deep side. ) Is formed substantially in a V-shape when viewed from the front (in the axial direction). As described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement between the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotation member 640 is rotated. Can be rotated.

  The one-side rotation driving member 637 has a connection wall 637c that partially connects the opposing inner surfaces of the engagement portion 637b. The connection wall 637c is formed in a shape curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front (axial direction view) around the axis of the one-side rotation drive member 637, and at the open side of the engagement portion 637b (the one-side rotation drive member 637). (Outer edge side) are connected to each other, and the inner surfaces on the inner side of the concave portion of the engaging portion 637b are not connected.

  Here, when the rotation member 640 is driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637, the engagement and release of the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts engaging with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one-side rotation drive member 637 increases, a large output is required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, reinforcement against an impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to be engaged. And weight reduction can be effectively achieved at the same time. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed on the case member 610 except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the center transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back side of the guide member 620. Here, the holding structure of the center transmission member 634 on the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 cut along a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the central transmitting body 634 is formed in a hat shape having a circular shape when viewed from the front and having a concave central portion. A gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the central concave portion, and the outermost edge is formed. A protruding portion 634b is formed to protrude radially outward from the portion in a flange shape.

  On the back side of the guide member 620, a pair of holding collars 623, 624 (see FIGS. 47 and 48) are superimposed at three places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (ie, positions at 120 ° intervals). The extension 634 b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. Thus, the center transmission member 634 can be rotatably held on the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

  That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 52) with respect to the guide member 620 can be regulated by bringing the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the axial direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 52) with respect to the guide member 620 is regulated by bringing the overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 into contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623, 624. it can.

  In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front (when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the central transmission member 634). Therefore, the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634 can be in a relationship where their arc shapes circumscribe (i.e., point-contact) each other, and their contact area is reduced. Thus, the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, by adopting a structure that holds the outer edge side (extended portion 634 b) of the central transmission member 634 in this way, the central recessed portion of the central transmission member 634 is axially attached to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. There is no need to support it, and there is no need for a space for disposing parts for supporting the shaft, so that an arrangement space for a pitching device 650 described later can be secured accordingly.

  Next, the operation of the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and shows a state where the central transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the drive mechanism 630 has a central transmission member 634 disposed at a position concentric with the axis O which is the center of rotation of the rotation member 640, and the second transmission member 634 is provided to the gear 634 a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c, 636c are arranged in a state where they are meshed. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are disposed at positions 180 degrees out of phase (that is, at positions facing each other across the axis O).

  Therefore, when the drive motor 631 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b causes The transmission member 634 is rotated.

  When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are respectively rotated with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotation is performed by the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution gear 635b and 636b. The gears 635c and 636c are transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 rotate. Is done.

  As described above, since the central transmission gear 634 is meshed with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a, by rotating the central transmission gear 634 with the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the driving of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is disposed concentrically with the axis O of the rotating member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are viewed in the direction of the axis O. In this case, the rotary member 640 can be disposed more inward than the outer edge portion (on the side of the axis O). That is, since the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 do not protrude outside the outer shape of the rotation member 640, the size can be reduced accordingly.

  When the guide member 620 is provided on the case member 610, the engagement portions 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are located radially outward of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement between the engagement portions 637b, 638b and the engaged portion 641. Thus, the rotating member 640 can be rotated.

  In this case, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, at positions facing each other with the axis O interposed therebetween). Therefore, as will be described later, the position (engagement position) for applying the driving force to the rotating member 640 is maximally separated, and the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In addition, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged in postures (rotational positions) in which the phases of the engaging portions 637b and 638b are different from each other. That is, when one of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is disengaged from the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. (One and the other are prevented from being simultaneously disengaged). Therefore, as described later, transmission of the driving force from the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 to the rotation member 640 can be suppressed from being intermittent, and the rotation of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. As described above, the rotation member 640 is an annular member in a front view that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotation mechanism 630, and is positioned concentrically with the center transmission member 634 and the guide member 620, and It is arranged on the front side of. In the present embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) as viewed from the front. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 54 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in FIG. 54B.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality (30 in this embodiment) of divided members DV, and the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly to each other along the circumferential direction. Thereby, it is formed in an annular shape in a front view.

  In this case, the plurality of divided members DV are formed so that the distance between adjacent divided members DV can be changed. That is, the rotating member 640 includes a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a second interval in which the divided members DV have an interval smaller than the first interval. To form a second section S2 that is connected in the circumferential direction. Note that, between the first section S1 and the second section S2, the interval between the divided members DV transitions from the first interval in the first section S1 to the second interval in the second section S2 (or vice versa). Is formed.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a front perspective view of the division member DV, and FIG. 56 (b) is a rear perspective view of the division member DV. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the division member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the division member DV. 56 to 58, the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to understand the connection structure between the division members DV.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the detection target portion 641c is formed in a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, whereas the remaining divided members DV have The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. The divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed have the same other configuration except for the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c. Therefore, hereinafter, the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the divided member DV in which formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the divided member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a rear-side main body 642 having the engaged portion 641 disposed on the rear side, and a front side of the rear-side main body 642. , A connecting link member 644 whose base end is rotatably supported between the rear body 642 and the front body 643, and a front body 643 disposed on the front side of the front body 643. The plate holding member 645, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 that are displaceably held by the plate holding member 645, and the front side main body 643 and the plate holding member 645 are slidably disposed. And an undulating link member 648.

  As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that is engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotation driving members 637 and 638 of the driving mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangular shape in a front view. The rear main body 642 is provided in a posture protruding from the rear surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 56B).

  On the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side main body 642, an opposing portion 641a facing the rear side of the rear side main body 642 at a predetermined interval is formed, and the opposing portion 641a and the rear side main body are formed. The outer edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the surfaces facing the second member 642. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the division member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from rising from the front of the guide member 620.

  A pair of cylindrical sliding rollers 641b is rotatably supported on the side of the mounting surface of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side body 642. The sliding roller 641b can make its rotation axis orthogonal to the back surface of the back side body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the division member DV), and can contact the outer peripheral surface with the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. It is arranged in a posture. Thereby, sliding resistance when the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a plate-like detected portion 641c is formed to protrude on the side opposite to the surface on which the engaged portion 641 is attached to the rear side main body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-like portion detected by the detection sensor 684 disposed on the guide member 680, and has a horizontal posture on the rear surface of the rear main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV). You.

  The rear side body 642 is a part whose rear surface is placed on the front of the guide member 620 and slides on the front of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 rotates, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view. In a state where the rotation member 640 is provided on the guide member 620, the rear-side main body 642 is provided in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, the respective rear-side main body portions 642 are arranged in a radial straight line with the axis O as the center (see FIG. 54).

  The back side main body 642 is provided with a connecting link opening 642a and an undulating link opening 642b, which are groove-shaped openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, and a front surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 57). A shaft support portion 642c formed to support the base end side of the connection link member 644 between the front side main body 643 (the shaft support portion 643b) and a bent portion projecting from the rear surface on the other longitudinal side (the upper side in FIG. 58). 642d.

  The connection link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is slidably inserted. The insertion of the insertion portion 644a into the connection link opening 642a causes the division member The DV can be connected to the adjacent division member DV via the connection link member 644. In addition, the connection link member 644 allows the distal end of the insertion portion 644a inserted into the connection link opening 642a to be inserted into the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620.

  The opening width of the connection link opening 642a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connection link opening 642a.

  When the divided member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a is connected to the connection link opening 642a. , The attitude of the connection link member 644 can be allowed to change with the action from the connection link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connection link member 644 with respect to the rear side main body 642 is generated, and the interval between the divided members DV can be increased or decreased.

  The undulating link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is slidably inserted. The undulating link member 648 guides the distal end of the insertion portion 648a inserted through the undulating link opening 642b to a guide member. 620 is inserted into the undulating link action groove 622.

  The opening width of the undulating link opening 642b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the undulating link opening 642b.

  When the divided member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is acted on by the undulating link operation groove 622 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a is moved to the undulating link opening 642b. , The display board 646 and the partition board 647 can be raised and lowered.

  As described above, since the shaft support 642c is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side body 642 (the lower side in FIG. 57), the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is viewed from the front with the engaged part 641 in front. It can be pivotally supported at the overlapping position. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the respective rotation driving members 637 and 638, and the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement is set to be adjacent. To the divided member DV through the connecting link member 644.

  The bent portion 642d is protruded from the rear surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the upper side in FIG. 58) of the rear body 642, and its protruding tip is opposed to the rear surface of the rear body 642 at a predetermined interval. The inner edge of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the bent portion of the protruding tip and the opposing surface of the rear side body 642. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the division member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from rising from the front of the guide member 620.

  In addition, the bent portion 642d is disposed in such a position that its base can contact the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge of the guide member 620, and the distance between the base of the bent portion 642d and the sliding roller 641b described above is The dimension is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the radial width of the guide member 620. Accordingly, the displacement of the division member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be regulated, and thus the main body member DV (the back side main body 642) is kept in the posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Thus, the guide member 620 can be displaced in the circumferential direction.

  The front-side main body 643 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view having substantially the same size as the rear-side main body 642, and is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A link slide groove 643a and a shaft supporting portion 643b formed on the back surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 58) and supporting the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between a back side body 642 (a shaft supporting portion 642c). And a support plate 643c protruding from the front and rotatably supporting the partition plate 647.

  The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably provided, and extends in parallel with the undulating link opening 642b. That is, the up / down link member 648 is slid along the up / down link slide groove 643a, so that the insertion portion 648a slides along the up / down link opening 642b.

  In the rear-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643, the width dimension on the other side in the longitudinal direction is smaller than the width dimension on one side in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front. That is, the rotation member 640 is formed in a wedge shape in a front view in which the width dimension of the portion located on the inner periphery side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion located on the outer periphery side. Therefore, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made smaller, the divided members DV can be brought close to each other, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, in the second section S2, the rear main body 642 and the front main body 643 are in circumferential contact with the adjacent rear main body 642 and front main body 643 (see FIGS. 54 and 73). .

  The connection link member 644 is a long member, and the base end side is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting portions 642c and 643b of the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and has a cylindrical insertion portion at the distal end side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a is projected in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connection link member 644, and as described above, the connection link of the guide member 620 via the connection link opening 642a of the rear body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV. Through the working groove 621.

  The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connection link opening 642a and the connection link operation groove 621. Accordingly, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the displacement of the divided member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can be minimized, and the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained constant. This can suppress the variation in the position of the detected portion 641c, and thus can improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71).

  The base end side of the connecting link member 644 rotatably supported by the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the shaft supporting portions 642c and 643b of the main bodies 642 and 643) is connected to the connecting link opening 642a. Is also provided at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the base end side of the connection link member 644 is disposed at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the axis O of the rotating member 640).

  As a result, the engagement portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotation drive members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, and the one-side and the other-side rotation drive members 637 and 638 rotate. When the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the divided member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via the connection link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  The undulating link member 648 is a member that is slidably held in the undulating link slide groove 643a of the front side body 643, and has a columnar insertion portion 648a formed on the back side and an action groove 648b formed on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a projects in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644, and as described above, is inserted into the up / down link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 through the up / down link opening 642b of the back side body 642. It is inserted.

  The action groove 648b is a portion for acting on the operated portion 646d of the display plate 646 by slidingly moving the undulating link member 648 to undulate the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647. It is formed in a groove shape extending linearly along the sliding direction, and an actuated portion 646d of the display panel 646 is slidably inserted between opposing surfaces of the groove portion.

  The display plate 646 has a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view, a shaft portion 646b and a connection shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an operation groove 648b of the undulating link member 648 facing each other. And a plate-shaped actuated portion 646d inserted between the surfaces. The actuated portion 646d is formed by bending in a substantially S-shape when viewed from the front, so that when the undulating link member 648 is slid, the affected portion 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. The display plate 646 can be rotated around the shaft portion 646b.

  The partition plate 647 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and a pair of shaft portions 647b on the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b. And a shaft support portion 647c that is formed and rotatably supports the connection shaft 646c of the display plate 646.

  Here, as described above, the rotating unit 600 is a rendering device configured to imitate a roulette that rotates a wheel having a plurality of pockets connected in the circumferential direction and drops a thrown ball into one of the pockets. The space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 of one divided member DV and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent divided member DV is used as a pocket, and the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) has a red color. Alternatively, black numbers are added and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, one display panel 646 is colored green and has a predetermined mark (star shape). In addition, as for the rotating member 640, only the display board 646 located in the first section S1 is visually recognized by the player. That is, the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member disposed on the front side thereof, and is invisible to the player.

  The plate holding member 645 includes a shaft support 645a that rotatably supports the shaft 646b of the display plate 646 and a shaft support 645b that rotatably supports the shaft 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the pivotal support by 645a and 645b.

  In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated about the shaft portion 646b with the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. Then, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated around the shaft portion 647b as a rotation center. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the division member DV in a state where it is arranged in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) It is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division | segmentation member DV in the state arrange | positioned in 2nd area S2. 59 and 60 show a state in which a part of the configuration is seen through for easy understanding, and the illustration of the connection link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d are omitted. As shown in FIG. 59, in a state where the division member DV is arranged in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is inserted into the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the rear body 642 and the front body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the axis O side), As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is placed in the horizontal position, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is placed in the upright position.

  Note that the horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface of the rear side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the division member DV), and the standing posture is a plate of the partition plate 647. The part 647a is in a posture orthogonal to and parallel to the rear surface of the rear-side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV).

  As shown in FIG. 60, in a state where the division member DV is arranged in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is connected to the large diameter portion 622a of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). Is inserted through. Therefore, the up-and-down link member 648 is slid to one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the opposite side to the axis O). Thereby, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal position to the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647, and is disposed in the inclined position, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is moved from the upright position. The display plate 646 is tilted toward the plate portion 646a and is disposed in an inclined posture.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated by the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. The partition plate 647 can also be rotated via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c.

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide the undulating link operation groove and the undulating link member for the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be shared. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (that is, the state where the plate 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted up and the plate 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward) from the state shown in FIG. When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is in the horizontal position and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is in the upright position, the rotating action of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) by its own weight is used. Thus, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and quickly.

  That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward, it can be rotated by its own weight in a direction in which it is tilted downward, thereby forming a horizontal posture and rotating the display plate 646 (own weight). Is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, whereby the partition plate 647 can be lifted to form a standing posture. Therefore, even if the rotation is hindered by the attachment of dirt or dust, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be reliably and promptly formed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the length of the display plate 646 that the plate portion 646a projects from the shaft portion 646b is set to be larger than the length of the partition plate 647 that the plate portion 647a projects from the shaft portion 647b. Therefore, the center of gravity of the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 can be close to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. Can be performed more reliably and promptly by utilizing the weight of the display panel 646.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. The pitching device 650 is a device for throwing the ball B to the rotating member 640, is accommodated in a central depression of the central transmitting member 634 of the driving mechanism 630, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching apparatus 650. FIG. FIG. 62 shows a state in which the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651, and illustration of the passage member 655 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pitching apparatus 650 includes a case body 651 formed in a container shape with an open front side, an arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed inside the case body 651, and a holding piece projecting / retracting. It mainly includes a mechanism 670, a passage member 655 disposed on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B formed of a translucent material into a sphere.

  The case body 651 has a substantially circular bottom wall portion 651a in a front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b erected from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a radially outer portion from the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. And an overhanging wall portion 651c formed so as to protrude in a flange-like shape, and the overhanging wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the guide member 620, so that the outer wall portion 651b has a standing end (opening portion). Is disposed at a position substantially coincident with the front surface of the rotating member 640 (the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

  A ball holding portion 652 is provided in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. A spherical depression having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the ball B is formed on the front surface of the ball holding portion 652, and the depression is set as a holding position (initial position) of the ball B. That is, when the ball B is placed on the ball holding portion 652, the ball B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

  In this case, the pitching device 650 is disposed with the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 positioned at the lowest position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B is moved to the outer wall portion. The inner peripheral surface of 651b (inner peripheral passage 651c1) rolls and is held on holding piece 677 at the projecting position of holding piece retracting mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pitching apparatus 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is located at the holding position. FIG. 65 is a view in which the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is located at the separated position. FIG. 17 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a folded state. 64 and 65 show a state in which the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 disposed on the bottom wall 651a of the case body 651, a front case 662 disposed in front of the rear case 661, A crank member 663 and an arm member 664 rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664. .

  Shafts 661a and 661b protrude from the rear case 661. A crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a, and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. On the crank member 663, a gear 663a meshed with the pinion gear 676 is engraved on the outer peripheral surface, and a pin portion 663b is protruded at a position eccentric from the rotation center (the shaft 661a). A sliding groove 664a through which the pin 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted is linearly extended in the arm member 664, and a rotation center (shaft 661b) is formed with respect to the sliding groove 664a. ), A curved portion 664b in a front view shape obtained by dividing the annular shape into halves is formed at a position on the opposite side.

  Therefore, the drive motor 665 is driven to rotate in the forward or reverse direction, and the crank member 663 is rotated through the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin 663b of the crank member 663 is rotated. By acting on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction around the shaft 661b.

  That is, the arm member 664 has a holding position (see FIG. 64) for holding the ball B on the ball holding portion 652 with the bending shape of the bending portion 664b along the outer peripheral portion of the ball holding portion 652, and a ball holding portion for holding the bending portion 664b. The ball B can be rotated (swinged) between the ball holding portion 652 and the separated position (see FIG. 65) at which the ball B is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 to the inner circumferential passage 651c1.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b (a range of a central angle of about 90 degrees on a side (lower side) separated from the shaft 661b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like body that curves along the inner peripheral surface of the bending portion 664b, and a shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side is rotatably supported by the bending portion 664b, and has a distal end side. Of the limit switch 667 disposed on the rear surface side (outer peripheral surface side) is maintained in an attitude of being lifted upward (inward in the radial direction) by the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a.

  Therefore, when the ball B is held by the ball holding portion 652 in a state where the arm member 664 is located at the holding position, the weight of the ball B pushes down the cantilever plate 664c about the shaft 664c1 as a rotation center, If the ball B is not held by the ball holding portion 652 while the limit switch 667 is turned on, the cantilever plate 664c is set in the posture in which it is lifted as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the ball B in the ball holding unit 652 can be detected.

  In this case, the concave portion of the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the sphere holding portion 652 are formed to have such a size that the sphere B can be displaced when the arm member 664 is disposed at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the depression of the ball holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when an external force (vibration) is input by the player being hit or shaken by the pachinko machine 10, the ball B can be displaced in accordance with the input of the vibration. That is, when the ball B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced with the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on / off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, the input of an external force to the pachinko machine 10 can be detected using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

  Returning to FIGS. 61 and 62, the description will be continued. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated to the separated position, the ball B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (the inner peripheral passage 651c1) of the outer wall 651b, and the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is moved. It is held on the holding piece 677 at the projecting position (see FIG. 68). The holding piece retracting mechanism 670 has a holding piece 677 formed so as to be able to protrude and retract between the protruding position and the retracted position. Is thrown on any one of the divided members DV (display panel 646). Here, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position. FIG. 67 is a holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in the state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG.

  FIG. 68A is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position, and FIG. 68B is a holding view taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the one-side retractable mechanism 670. FIG. 69A is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 69B is a line LXIXb-LXIXb of FIG. 69A. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed to be curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall 651 b of the case body 651 and is disposed on the bottom wall 651 a of the case body 651. Rear case 671, a front case 672 disposed in front of the rear case 671, a slide member 673 slidably held between opposing surfaces of the rear case 671 and the front case 672, and the slide member A drive motor 675 for driving the 673 and a pinion gear 676 are provided, and a holding piece 677 that comes and goes with the sliding displacement of the slide member 673 is provided.

  The rear case 671 includes two sets of one-to-one pairs of roller members 674 that are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval, and holds the slide member 673 between the sets of roller members 674 so as to be slidable. The rear case 671 includes a sliding base 671a having a rectangular plate shape in a top view and extending from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction toward the front side. The upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672. The sliding displacement (projection to the front side and immersion to the rear side) of the holding piece 677 is guided between the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) of the holding member and the holding member 677.

  A pin portion 673a protrudes from one end (lower portion) in the circumferential direction of the slide member 673, and a rack gear 673b on which the pinion gear 676 meshes is provided on the inner peripheral surface at the other end (information portion) in the circumferential direction. It is engraved along. Further, a sliding groove 677a into which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted extends in the holding piece 677 so as to bend in a substantially Z-shape. That is, the sliding groove 677a has one end side (right side in FIG. 66) offset from the other end side (left side in FIG. 66) toward the front side.

  Therefore, the drive motor 675 is driven to rotate in the forward or reverse direction, and the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675 is rotated, thereby causing the slide member 673 to slide and displace via the rack gear 673b. By causing the pin 673a of the member 673 to act on the sliding groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be protruded to the front side or immersed to the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 can be slid and displaced between a protruding position (see FIG. 68) protruding toward the front side and an immersing position (see FIG. 69) immersing toward the back side.

  Here, on the upper surface of the holding piece 677, the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner peripheral passage 651c1) is located on the back side (the right side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). A curved surface 677b curved concentrically with the inner circumferential passage 651c1 and smoothly connected in the circumferential direction to the inner circumferential passage 651c1, and connected to the edge of the curved surface 677b and toward the front side (the left side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). Are formed, and a descending inclined surface 677d connected to the edge of the inclined surface 677c and inclined downward toward the front side is formed.

  Therefore, in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position (see FIGS. 68A and 68B), the holding piece 677 falls down from the ball holding portion 652 and rolls on the inner circumferential passage 651c1, thereby bending the holding piece 677. The rolling of the ball B reaching the surface 677b to the front side (the left side in FIG. 68 (b)) is restricted by the rising slope of the rising slope 677c, and is held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b). Can be.

  On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is immersed from the protruding position to the rear side and is arranged at the immersion position (see FIGS. 69A and 69B), the front side of the front case 672 faces the rear side (FIG. 69B). The ball B whose movement is restricted to the right) moves over the rising inclined surface 677c and is positioned on the descending inclined surface 677d with the displacement of the holding piece 677 in the immersion direction (back side). Thus, the ball B can be rolled along the descending slope of the descending inclined surface 677d, and the ball B can be thrown toward the front side (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  Note that the curved surface 677b smoothly connects the ball B falling from the ball holding portion 652 and rolling on one of the inner circumferential passages 651c1 to the holding piece 677 since both sides in the circumferential direction smoothly connect to the inner circumferential passage 651c1. It can pass over the surface 677b and roll to the other inner peripheral passage 651c1. That is, the ball B can be reciprocated between the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on one side in the circumferential direction and the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on the other side in the circumferential direction via the curved surface 677b. Further, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner peripheral passage 651c1, when the momentum of the ball B is lost and the rolling is converged, the ball B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. Can be done.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the passage member 655 is provided on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersion operation (immersion to the immersion position) of the holding piece 677 is divided by the dividing member DV (display) of the rotating member 640. The plate 646) has a ball-sending path 655a as a path when the ball is thrown onto the plate 646), and a return path 655b as a path when the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is returned to the ball holding portion 652.

  The throwing path 655a has a groove 655a1 having a substantially U-shaped cross-section and having a width substantially equal to that of the downwardly inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, and extending to the front side. A front portion 655a2 that is connected to the side edge and is substantially flush with the display plate 646 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and a split member DV of the rotating member 640 that is erected from both sides in the width direction of the front portion 655a2. A pair of opposed portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same interval as the interval between the partition plates 647 is provided.

  Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is retracted to the retracted position, the ball B rolled on the downwardly inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove 655a1, and the extending direction of the groove 655a1. , The ball B can be thrown while suppressing the rattling.

  Further, the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the division member DV, and the opposing interval of the pair of opposing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the opposing interval of the partition plate 647 of the split member DV. The ball B thus formed can be smoothly arranged on the display plate 646 of the division member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotation member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotational position) at which the partition plate 647 of the division member DV coincides with the facing portion 655a3 based on the detection result of the detection sensor 684 described later.

  The return passage 655b includes a rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface that rolls downstream when the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is received on the upstream side, and a downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1. And an upright portion 655b2 that is upright and curved to direct the rolling direction of the ball B toward the back side.

  In the front view of the pitching device 650, the rolling portion 655b1 has the upstream side disposed on the inner peripheral edge of the rotating member 640 and the downstream side disposed on the front side of the ball holding portion 652b. In addition, the rolling portion 6551b1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side, and to be inclined downwardly toward the ball holding portion 652 on the downstream side.

  The sphere B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is moved radially by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b of the guide member 680 described later. When the ball B is pushed out to the upstream side and sent to the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B is rolled downstream by the rolling portion 655b1 and dropped to the ball holding portion 652 while being guided by the standing portion 655b2. You.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. As described above, the guide member 680 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member disposed along the lower part of the rotating member 640, and guides the sphere B on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 at the time of transportation accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 640 (that is, the guide member 680). The ball B is supported from below), and a detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is held. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

  70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base 681 disposed on the case member 610, a plate-shaped transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base 681, and a rear side of the transmission plate 682. And a plurality of (six in this embodiment) detection sensors 684 disposed on the base 681.

  The base 681 is a member formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape at a central angle of approximately 120 degrees (that is, a shape curved in an arc shape in a front view), and a guide surface 681a is formed on an inner peripheral surface side thereof. . The guide surface 681a is arranged on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member 640, and faces the sphere B arranged on the division member DV (that is, the space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, it is arranged on the division member DV of the rotating member 640, and supports the ball B conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 from below.

  A return guide 681b is formed on the inner peripheral surface side of the base 681, and is connected to the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a. The return guide 681b is a portion for sending the ball B conveyed along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, and has a smaller width than the guide surface 681a and has a radial direction. By being formed in a shape protruding inward, the rotating member 640 is disposed facing the divided member DV (display plate 646) (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

  Therefore, when the ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction with the rotation of the rotating member 640, the return guide is provided by the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the divided member DV. Sphere B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the ball B is pushed inward in the radial direction by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.

  Here, even when the formation of the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to the position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is inclined downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate is not rotated. The ball B can be dropped to the return passage 655b along the downward slope of 647. However, in this case, the ball B is conveyed upward before the ball B starts rolling under its own weight, so that the falling position when the ball B is dropped becomes high and the ball B Since the ball B falls after being rolled along the descending slope, the momentum when the ball B falls is large. Therefore, the return path 655b may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by providing the return guide 681b, the drop position when the ball B is dropped into the return path 655b can be lowered, and the ball B slides on the return guide 681b. Since the ball is sent to the return passage 655b while being sent, the speed at which the ball is sent can be reduced. As a result, breakage of the return passage 655b can be suppressed.

  The transmission plate 682 is a portion facing the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 at a predetermined interval (interval capable of holding the ball B), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is formed. The passage member 655 extends upward to a position facing the throwing path 655a (front portion 655a2). This can prevent the ball B thrown from the throwing device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 from jumping out.

  In addition, the transmission plate 682 is not only the divided member DV on which the ball B is thrown (that is, the divided member DV having the same phase as the front part 655a2 of the ball feeding passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the divided member DV (the ball B Since it is formed in a size (width dimension) that can partially face the divided member DV adjacent to the downstream side (in the transport direction), the ramp of the ball B thrown from the throwing path 655a is not affected by the transmission plate 682. The ball B can be easily converged, and the ball B can be stably transported to the return guide 681b.

  On the other hand, the transmission plate 682 has a size (width dimension) capable of facing the divided member DV on which the ball B is thrown and the divided member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the divided member DV. And it does not face the divided member DV located downstream of the adjacent divided member DV. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 on the downstream side in the transport direction of the ball B (the right side in FIG. 70) and the return guide 681b, and the transport of the ball B can be visually recognized by the player. Can be easier.

  In addition, since the transmission plate 682 is entirely made of a light-transmitting material, the player can see through the member and the ball B located on the back side thereof. Accordingly, the thrown ball B passes through the throwing path 655a and falls between the display plate 647 and the transmission plate 682 of the divided member DV, and the rotation of the rotating member 640 while being supported by the guide surface 681a. A series of transported modes can be visually recognized by the player.

  The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base 681). One end of the cantilever plate 683 in the circumferential direction is rotatably supported on the base 681 by a shaft 685, and the other end in the circumferential direction is resilient to a limit switch leaf spring (not shown) disposed on the base 681. It is maintained in a posture raised upward (inward in the radial direction).

  When the other end in the circumferential direction of the cantilever plate 683 is lifted upward, the limit switch is turned off, and when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B Due to the weight, the cantilever plate 683 is pushed down around the shaft 685 as the rotation center, and the limit switch is turned on. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the ball throwing device 650 is arranged at an appropriate position (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  On the other hand, when the ball B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 and the weight of the ball B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is reduced to a predetermined value or less, the posture in which the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. And the limit switch is turned off.

  The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and is formed as a non-contact sensor in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged to face each other. Of the divided member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) on the movement locus of the detected portion 641c, and are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1.

  Therefore, a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) divided members DV that are adjacent in the circumferential direction can be respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensor 684, and the rotating member 640 is moved by a predetermined amount (that is, corresponding to the first interval). For each rotation by the rotation amount), the divided member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction.

  In this case, as described above, the detection target portion 641c is formed in a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, whereas the remaining divided members DV have The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed is disposed, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned off. The detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed is arranged to receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and the detection signal is turned on (see FIG. 76). As a result, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on a combination of the detection results of the detection sensors 684, as described later.

  In the present embodiment, since the two detection results (ON / OFF) based on the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, 64 (= 2 to the sixth power). Any combination can be formed. In this case, the number of the divided members DV is 30. Therefore, as described later, the detection sensor 684 detects which of the plurality of divided members DV is located at the reference position. It can always be determined based on the result.

  Next, the operation of the rotation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, an operation of changing the interval between the divided members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640. FIG. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73 (b) is a part of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

  In order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, FIGS. 72 and 73 show only the rear side main body 642, the connecting link member 644, and the undulating link member 648 among the components of the division member DV. 73 shows a state in which the connecting link operation groove 621 and the undulating link operation groove 622 are hatched.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rotating member 640 is a member formed to be rotatable about the axis O as a center of rotation (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620), and includes a plurality of divided members DV. Are formed endlessly in a circumferential direction. That is, in each of the divided members DV, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is rotatably supported by the back side body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the distal end side of the connecting link member 644 is on the back side of the adjacent divided member DV. It is inserted into the connection link action groove 621 through the connection link opening 642 a in the main body 642.

  As described above, the rear side main body 642 of the divided member DV has the sliding roller 641b on one side in the longitudinal direction and the bent portion 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction abutting on the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the posture of the guide member 620 relative to the guide member 620 is such that the axis O is positioned on an extension of the back side body 642 in the longitudinal direction (that is, the axis O is radiated about the axis O). (A linear posture). That is, only movement in a state where the posture is maintained is allowed.

  In this case, the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (the side rotatably supported) of the connection link member 644 than the small-diameter portion 621b. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted through the large diameter portion 621a of the action groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the connection link member 644 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the rear side body 642. As a result, the back-side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the first section S1 can be made a large interval (first interval).

  On the other hand, the small-diameter portion 621b of the connection link action groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (the side rotatably supported) of the connection link member 644 than the large-diameter portion 621a. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73B), the connection link member 644 is positioned along the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642, and The side main bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the second section S2 can be made a small interval (second interval).

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 640 is an effect device formed by imitating roulette, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a). That is, an effect is performed by allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information displayed on the display board 646. Therefore, in consideration of the visibility of the player, it is preferable that the display plate 646 (display of identification information) is large, and in order to ensure a variation of the effect, the number of display plates 646 (the identification information Type) is preferably large.

  In this case, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646) needs to have a certain size or more, and the size is maintained. When the number of displayed identification information (the number of display plates 646) is increased while the rotation member 640 is enlarged, the rotation member 640 is not accommodated in a predetermined installation space, but is rotated so as to fit in a predetermined space. When the diameter is reduced, the number of displayed identification information (the number of display boards 646) decreases, and it becomes impossible to secure a variation in the effect.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the division members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and the first section S1 having the interval smaller than the first interval in the first section S1. As described above, the display plate 646 (the plate portion 646a) located in the first section S1 is formed while the rotating member 640 can be formed with the second section S2 in which the division member DV is circumferentially connected at intervals of 2. The display is made visible to the player (the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member).

  Therefore, as compared with the case where all of the plurality of divided members DV are connected at the first interval, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In addition to this, it is possible to increase the number of display of the identification information (the number of the display boards 646) while securing the size of the display of the identification information (that is, the display board 646) to a certain size or more. As a result, it becomes impossible to ensure the visibility of the player and the variation of the effect.

  Here, in the first section S1, since the plate portion 646a of the display panel 646 is disposed in a horizontal posture (a posture parallel to the moving plane of the division member DV) in the first section S1, such a display panel is used. The identification information displayed at 646 can be easily recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, in the second section S2, as described above, the dividing member DV is in a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display panel 646 is higher in the leading end side than the horizontal posture in the first section S1. Interference with the DV can be suppressed, and the divided members DV can be brought closer to each other. That is, the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 can be reduced. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is disposed on the upper surface of the front side main body 643 so as to be displaceable (rotatable), and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is connected to the adjacent divided member DV (plate holding member). The member 645) can be lifted above the upper surface (that is, a position where no interference occurs) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the dividing member DV can be brought close to the position where the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 abut each other. That is, the second interval in the second section S2 can be further reduced. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the rotating member can be suppressed.

  Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 74A to 74D are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and illustrate the one-side rotation driving member 637 viewed from the front.

  FIGS. 74 (b), 74 (c), and 74 (d) correspond to the states rotated by 30, 60 and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. Also, in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV is shown in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 is indicated by a two-dot chain line. It is illustrated using FIG.

  Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are formed in the same shape as described above. In the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by these, only the driving operation by the one-side rotation driving member 637 is described, and the description of the driving operation by the other-side rotation driving member 638 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the one-side rotation driving member 637 has a movement locus of the engagement portion 637b partially corresponding to a movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. It is disposed at an overlapping position, and in the overlapping portion, it is rotatable in a state where the engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. The circle of the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a smaller diameter than the circle of the movement locus of the engaged portion 641.

  When the one-side rotation drive member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the division member DV via the engagement between the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. Then, the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via each connecting link member 644, whereby the rotating member 640 is rotated. Rotated in the direction.

  In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the rotation amount of the rotation member 640 with respect to the unit rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 necessary for rotating the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased). ). Therefore, the apparent reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axis O of the rotating member 640, the rotating torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotational drive of the rotating member 640 (particularly, the rotational drive from a stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, the driving mechanism 630 includes one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638, which are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members DV can be suppressed. That is, even when the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are disposed at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force from each of the rotation driving members 637 and 638 can be applied to the two most distant portions of the rotation member 640 (the plurality of divided members DV), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is reduced. Can be stabilized.

  In this case, in the state of the division member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 that is pivotally supported by the division member DV is inserted into the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620. , The second state inserted through the small-diameter portion 621b, and the third state inserted through the connection portion 621c. In the present embodiment, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other side The rotation driving member 638 can apply a driving force to the divided member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging portions 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV in the third state). ).

  Thereby, a driving force can be applied to the divided member DV in a state where the distance between the adjacent divided member DV is changed from the first distance to the second distance (or vice versa). Since such a divided member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c, the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 to which the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly (movement of each divided member DV in the circumferential direction). The division member DV that receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c is directly driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, so that the plurality of division members DV are endless. Can be stably displaced (rotated).

  Note that the period during which the driving force is transmitted from the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 to the division member DV completely matches the period when the division member DV is in the above-described third state. It is not necessary that the former period in which the driving force is transmitted and the latter period in the third state be at least partially overlapped.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulating link operation groove 622 are formed at positions where the phases are different. That is, when the division member DV is in the above-described third state, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 provided in the division member DV is connected to the large-diameter portion 622a or the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622. It is inserted.

  Therefore, when the division member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 that is supported by the division member DV passes through the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621. Thereafter, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 (or vice versa).

  Accordingly, the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulating link operation groove 622 do not receive a reaction force at the same time, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be made different. As a result, the necessary driving force can be dispersed, and accordingly, the output required for the driving motor 631 of the driving mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed with their phases (rotational positions of the engagement portions 637b, 638b) different from each other, so that the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is performed. Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the state of engagement or disengagement of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 with the division member DV and the phase. In FIG. 75, the upper-level state relationship diagram corresponds to the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the lower-level state relationship diagram corresponds to the other-side rotation drive member 638. In FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or disengaged state.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engagement portion 637b of the engagement portions 637b formed at three places of the one-side rotation drive member 637 engages with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. Is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotation driving member 637 performs the first rotation drive until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (that is, until the phase rotates 100 ° from the reference position). While the first engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the divided member DV, the engagement is released while the phase is approximately 100 ° to 120 °. And the transmission of the driving force to the divided member DV is released.

  After that, the second engagement portion 637b and the third engagement portion 637b of the engagement portions 637b formed at three places of the one-side rotation drive member 637 are the first engagement portion 637b. The same engagement and disengagement states (that is, engagement during a rotation angle of approximately 100 ° and release during a rotation angle of approximately 20 °) are repeated.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, with respect to the other-side rotation driving member 638, the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions are respectively engaged and released in the same manner as in the case of the above-described one-side rotation driving member 637. (That is, engagement during a rotation angle of approximately 100 ° and release during a rotation angle of approximately 20 °) are repeated.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are arranged with different phases (rotational positions of the engagement portions 637b and 638b). You. That is, the other side rotation drive member 638 has a phase at which the first engagement portion 638b of the three engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions starts engaging with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. The phase is set to be about 40 ° delayed from the phase (reference position) at which the first engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 starts engagement.

  As a result, while one of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 is disengaged from the division member DV (that is, the transmission of the driving force is released), the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the other-side rotation driving member 638 has one side. The phase (rotational position) of the engagement portions 637b and 638b is set such that the other one of the rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the division member DV. Thus, it is possible to avoid a state in which the engagement with the division member DV is simultaneously released from both the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638. As a result, it is possible to suppress intermittent transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640, and to stabilize the displacement of the rotating member 640.

  That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV in an endless manner, the transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent. Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the interval between the divided members DV tends to be increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture of the entire rotating member 640 becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 is in the released state, the other is in the engaged state, and the driving force is applied to the rotation member 640. Can be formed so that the distance between the divided members DV can be easily kept constant. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

  Next, the operation of detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member 640, and illustrates a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the divided member DV is developed on a straight line.

  In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, reference numerals “A to F” are shown for the detection sensor 684, and reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown for the divided member DV. The detection state is illustrated by the symbol of “ON, OFF”. In FIG. 76, the detected portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.

  Here, in the description of FIG. 76, each of the detection sensors 684 is represented by a detection sensor A, a detection sensor B,. , The detection sensor F, and each of the divided members DV is referred to as a first divided member DV, a second divided member DV,..., A thirtieth divided member DV, and distinguished from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first divided member DV reaches a phase (rotational position) that can be detected by the detection sensor A, the second divided member DV shifts to the sixth position. The division members DV are arranged in phases that can be detected by the detection sensors B to F, respectively.

  Therefore, in the detection sensors A and C to F, the light received by the light receiving unit of the light emitted from the light emitting unit is blocked by the detected portions 641c of the first divided member DV and the third to sixth divided members DV. Then, while the detection state is turned off, the detection sensor B can receive light emitted from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit, and the detection state is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the divided member DV moves in the circumferential direction (FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b)). To the left), the divided member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned off by the light shielding of the third to seventh divided members DV (the detected portions 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned on. You.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the divided member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned off by the light shielding of the third to sixth divided members DV and the eighth divided member DV (detected portion 641c), while the detection is performed. In the sensor E, the detection state is turned on.

  Thereafter, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount, the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one), and this is changed to the number of division members DV (this embodiment). When the rotation is repeated 30 times (that is, the rotation member 640 is rotated once), the state returns to the state shown in FIG.

  In this case, as described above, there are two types of rotating members 640, one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and one in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of divided members DV in the circumferential direction, the detection target portions 641c are arranged in a predetermined manner so as to be unequally spaced in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement refers to a combination of the presence or absence of the detection target 641c (that is, the detection sensor A), regardless of which of the six adjacent divided members DV is taken out of the 30 divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction. ＦF detection states) means arrays in which all combinations are different.

  Therefore, a table of such combinations (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F are associated with the divided members DV to be detected at the time of the detection) is created in advance, and stored in the ROM. The phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be ascertained by referring to the table each time AF detects. That is, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of (30 in the present embodiment) divided members DV is located at the reference position.

  Here, a slit continuous in the circumferential direction is provided in the rotating member 640, and the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added. , The rotation amount (phase) of the rotation member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a failure in light reception of the light receiving portion of the detection sensor 684, a deviation occurs between the rotation amount of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative addition number of the pulse number, and the phase of the rotating member 640 is accurately determined. Cannot be detected. That is, once a detection failure occurs, it affects the subsequent detection results, and each time a detection failure occurs, the effect on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detected parts 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 and the movement of the plurality of detected parts 641c Since a plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) are provided on the trajectory, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is detected based on a combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based only on the current detection results detected by the detection sensors A to F. Is not required, so that even if a detection failure has occurred in the past, the detection failure does not affect the detection, and the phase of the rotating member 640 can be accurately detected.

  As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV, the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be made different. That is, it is possible to detect the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 using the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to any of the plurality of divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction (that is, any pocket of the rotating member 640 simulating roulette). be able to.

  Further, as described above, the arrangement intervals of the detection sensors A to F are set with reference to the intervals of the division members DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are set to the division members DV in the first section S1). Is located at a position where the detected portion 641c can be detected), compared with the case where the interval between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is a reference, the space required for disposing the detection sensors A to F. Can be easily secured, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In other words, in a case where the detection sensors A to F are provided at positions where the detection portions 641c of the divided member DV can be detected in the second section S2, a space for arranging these detection sensors A to F is secured. Therefore, there is a limitation in reducing the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are disposed on the first section S1 side, the setting of the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is not restricted, and the second sensor S is not limited to the second section S2. The interval of 2 can be a narrower interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, two (on / off) detection results based on the presence / absence of the detection target portion 641c of the divided member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively. 2 6) combinations can be formed.

  In this case, the number of the divided members DV is 30, and therefore, five detection sensors 684 are sufficient (that is, 32 (= 2 to the fifth power) combinations can be formed). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (the light is not shielded by the detected portion 641c), and therefore, at a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to the state. However, the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 cannot be obtained.

  On the other hand, by using the six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection results of all of the six detection sensors 684 are turned off (the state where the light is not blocked by the detected portion 641c). ) Can be avoided. That is, at least one of the six detection sensors 684 can turn on the detection result (the light is blocked by the detection target 641), so that all the phases (rotation) At the position), the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.

  FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view in which the portion of the rotating member 640 in the first section S1 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the divided member DV has the plate portion 646a arranged in a horizontal posture and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (see FIGS. 57 and 58). (See FIG. 77, left side) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV.

  In the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed such that a side surface of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b is curved in an arc shape (see an enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Accordingly, when the display plate 646 is arranged in a horizontal posture by rotating the plate portion 646a about the shaft portion 646b, the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a faces the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the distance between the side of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b (the arc-shaped side surface) and the side surface of the plate holding member 645.

  Accordingly, in the first section S1, when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to make a relative displacement in a direction to reduce the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is moved. Such a relative displacement can be restricted by contacting the side surface with the side surface of the plate holding member 645. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided members DV from being displaced in a direction to reduce the distance therebetween, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684.

  On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the end of the connecting link opening 642a in the rear side body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV (the end on one side in the extending direction, FIG. ) Lower side) (see FIG. 73 (a)), so that when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to make a relative displacement in a direction to widen their interval (first interval), When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is in contact with the end of the connection link opening 642a, such phase displacement can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided members DV from being displaced in a direction to increase the distance therebetween, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always open is described. However, the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is disposed at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. , A tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the passage. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 78 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  As illustrated in FIG. 78, the left swing unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges a ball to the right rear of the first wall portion 513 when viewed from the front, a direction in which the distribution base member 2521 extends, and a length of the elongated hole 2521d. It mainly includes a first passage forming member 2520 whose extension direction is substantially straight, and a tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  The base member 2510 includes a side downflow passage 2515 extending rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. Although the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 is different from the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 in the first embodiment, the technical idea is the same, and therefore, the description is omitted in this embodiment.

  The side flow-down passage 2515 is a passage for discharging the ball that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position.

  The first passage forming member 2520 includes a distribution base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The distribution base member 2521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a that constitutes one side of the ball flow passage, an elongated hole 2521d extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. A second distribution convex portion 252e arranged to face the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side in front view of the front side, and a rear side facing the front side of the hanging plate portion on the right side in front view of the second distribution convex portion 252e. And a discharge recess 2521h recessed from the side surface.

  The hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 at a lower end portion of which a portion of the lower wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (the left side in FIG. 78) is cut and recessed, and a passage cover member at a lower end portion. And a shaft support hole 2521a3 formed in a circular shape in a direction opposite to the passage cover member on the opposite side to the shaft cover member 2522.

  The concave portion 2521a2 is a concave portion that forms an opening on the lower surface of the first passage forming member 2520 in cooperation with the concave portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The tip wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the recessed portion 2521a by a rotation operation.

  The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body portion 2561a of the distal end wall member 2560 is supported by a pin member on a rod, and is disposed at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522. You.

  The second distribution convex portion 2521g is a portion having substantially the same shape as the distribution convex portion 521e, and is a portion that distributes the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 to the left and right. The discharge concave portion 2521h is provided with a space larger than the diameter of the sphere provided between the discharge concave portion 2521h and the first wall portion 513, and reaches the first wall portion 513 to the right of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. The sorted balls are introduced from the discharge concave portion 2521h into the side downflow passage 2515, and then discharged outside the game area.

  The passage cover member 2522 has a plate-like plate portion 2522a covered on the front side of the distribution base member 2521, and extends in a plate shape from both short-side end portions of the plate-like portion 2522a toward the rear side. And upper and lower wall portions 2522b.

  The plate-shaped portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described in the first embodiment and a shaft support hole 2522a2 formed at the lower end portion in a circular shape coaxial with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the distribution base member 2521. Prepare. The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the distal end wall member 2560.

  The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are provided with a recessed portion 2522b1 that is recessed at a position facing the recessed portion 2521a2 and that forms an opening through which a ball can pass in cooperation with the recessed portion 2521a2.

  The distal end wall member 2560 is disposed between the distribution base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520, and rotates as a rod-shaped pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. It mainly includes a main body member 2561 having a substantially Z-shape as viewed from the front, which is rotatably supported, and a torsion spring 2562 for urging the main body member 2561 clockwise as viewed from the front.

  The torsion spring 2562 is configured such that one arm is fixed to the distal end of the passage cover member 2522, and the other arm is in contact with a locking pin 2561e protruding rearward from the distal end wall member 2560.

  With reference to FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 will be described. FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of main body member 2561 of distal wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of main body member 2561 of distal wall member 2560, and FIG. FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79B. In FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (d), the shape of the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position ( FIG. 79 (d) illustrates a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 81).

  As shown in FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 includes a cylindrical main body 2561a that is coaxially supported with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78), and a radial direction from the main body 2561a. Plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, a flow-down hole 2561c formed in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or greater than the diameter of the sphere, and a side opposite to the main body portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b. A curved wall portion 2561d extending along an arc centered on the main body portion 2561a from an end portion of the main body portion 2561a, and a locking pin protruding at a distal end portion of the curved wall portion 2561d in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a. 2561e and a portion disposed on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with respect to the main body member 2561a, and has a shape smaller than the opening at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520. A pushing portion 2561F, mainly it comprises.

  The plate portion 2561b is formed such that the radial length (length in the extending direction) of the main body portion 2561a is longer than the dimension of the opening at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 in the short direction (vertical direction in FIG. 80). You. Thereby, the rotation stop position of tip wall member 2560 in the biasing direction of torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to the position where plate portion 2561b and upper wall portion of upper and lower wall portion 2522b come into contact. 79 (d)).

  In the released state (see FIG. 79 (d)), the curved wall portion 2561d stops the downward flow by causing the sphere to collide with the contact wall 2561d1 disposed opposite to the sphere flowing down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving below the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is rolled by a rolling wall disposed behind the contact wall 2561d1. Rolling over 2561d2 has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow.

  Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, FIG. 80 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position, and FIG. FIG. 82 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount in a front view, and FIG. 82 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position. In addition, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an outline at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is at the release position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. And stays between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall portion 513, the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the discharge recess 2521h is disposed on the front side of the side flow passage 2515. This allows the ball to flow down the side downflow passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 80, the ball introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stays in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next incoming ball enters the discharge recess 2521h. This prevents the next sphere from coming out (the upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g.

  The sphere fixed to the outside (the upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g rotates the first passage forming member 2520 clockwise when viewed from the front, and guides the second distribution convex portion 2521g. By being disposed at a position along the right wall of the wall 513a, it is introduced to the left of the second distribution projection 2521g, and is supplied between the upper and lower walls 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. You. Thus, even if a plurality of balls reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, only one ball can be introduced into the discharge recess 2521h.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position, the first passage forming member 2520 moves from the base end (the left end in FIG. 80) to the front end (the right end in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured to be inclined upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the sphere supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 remaining, and reaches the state shown in FIG. Flows toward the base end by the action of gravity, so that the ball can be prevented from dropping from the front end.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the state between the release position and the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 has the second distribution convex. The rider gets on the tip of the part 2521g and stops flowing down. Thus, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed between the release position and the connection position, the ball is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first path forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the distal end. Therefore, if the opening at the distal end is always open, the ball remains between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 (see FIG. 78). May fall from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be caught by another unit (such as the rotating unit 600 (see FIG. 5)), which may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the distal end wall member 2560 is disposed at the opening at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as a lid of the opening. Can be reliably prevented from dropping from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the connection position, the ball that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is the left side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. Is moved to the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and the extending direction of the first passage forming member 2520. Down along.

  At the connection position, the pushing portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 abuts against the wall surface of the housing recess 422f of the driving slide member 420 (the wall surface of the housing recess 422f is disposed on the displacement trajectory of the pushing portion 2561f). The curved wall portion 2561d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 82) protruding outside the first passage forming member 2520. That is, since the rotation of the distal end wall member 2560 is caused by the change in the position of the first passage forming member 2520, the driving force of the distal end wall member 2560 can also be used as the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. As a result, it is possible to reduce product costs.

  At this time, at the connection position, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated to a position where the plate portion 2561b is in a plane position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b, so that the sphere reaching the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 can be smoothly moved. The ball can be sent to the downflow hole 2561c (without bouncing as in the case where a step is generated between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and the plate portion 2561b).

  The sphere that has passed through the downflow hole 2561c is guided to the sensor member 422c of the driving slide member 420 by rolling on the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d serves to stop the sphere reaching the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and to guide the sphere sent from the first passage forming member 2520 through the downflow hole 2561c. , Is also used.

  In addition, at the connection position (see FIG. 82), the plate portion 2561b is located at the lower surface of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 (see FIG. 78). , The plate portion 2561b enters the inside (upper side in FIG. 82) of the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the ball can pass through the downflow hole 2561c only after reaching the connection position (the state where the ball is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d until the connection position is reached is secured).

  Accordingly, even if the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from the connection position to the release position in a state where the ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the ball is moved to the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520. It can be reliably prevented from falling from. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are sent in a row.

  With reference to FIG. 83, a case where a plurality of balls are sent to the first passage forming member 2520 in a row will be described. FIGS. 83A to 83C are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), the passages of the spheres of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially viewed in cross section, and in FIG. 83 (a), the first passage is formed. FIG. 83 (b) shows a state where the forming member 2520 is arranged at the connection position. In FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 rotates a predetermined amount counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 83 (a). 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the end wall member 2560 is partitioned. FIG.

  Also, in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), a sphere that flows down to the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the push-in portion 2561f is in contact with the housing recess 422f in the connected state, and has a recessed portion 2561f1 on the lower side in FIG. 83 (a) with the contact position as a starting point. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed closer to the shaft support 516 than the arc C21 centered on the shaft support 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, the tip wall member 2560 starts rotating by the biasing force of the torsion spring 2562 as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from FIG. In FIG. 83 (a), the ball disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d is referred to as a feed ball P21, and the ball disposed on the left side is referred to as a residual ball P22.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters inside the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 comes into contact with the contact wall 2561d, and the flow of the residual sphere P22 stops.

  On the other hand, the feed ball P21 is disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, so that the flowing ball P21 does not stop flowing down by the contact wall 2561d and passes through the flow-down hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520. It is possible to throw.

  In this case, the feed ball P21 may be lifted to the upper end of the curved wall 2561d (see FIG. 83 (b)). The upper walls of the upper and lower walls 2522b are opposed to each other in the moving direction of the curved wall 2561d. Since the feed ball P21 is pushed in by its wall, it can be ensured that the feed ball P21 passes through the downflow hole 2561c. Accordingly, the diameter of the opening of the flow-down hole 2561c can be suppressed to the same level as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow path of the sphere flowing down the flow-down hole 2561c can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall portion 2561d of the drive side slide member 420 is rotated. Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side when moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a portion for rolling the feed ball P21 and the rolling wall thereof. The feeding ball P21 is caused to flow down while the distance between the lower end of the 2561d2 and the upper end of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (the first passage is formed until the feeding ball P21 partitions down. By stopping the member 2520 at the position of FIG. 83 (c) or slowing down the speed near the position of FIG. 83 (c)), it is ensured that the ball flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. To do It can be.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven side slide member 430 has been described. However, the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 according to the third embodiment has the third symbol display. The device 81 is disposed to the left of the driven slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 according to the third embodiment, illustrating the elevating operation of the driving-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 3430 in chronological order. 84 to 88, the right and left members among the members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the descending regulation member 415 and the elevation regulating member 417 is partially enlarged.

  84 shows a state immediately after the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 abuts on the driven slide member 3430. In FIG. 85, the rack 452 is raised from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 86 shows a state in which the driven slide member 3430 is arranged at the ascending position, and FIG. 86 shows a state in which only the drive slide member 420 is moved down from the state of FIG. 85 and is arranged at the lowered position. 86, the driven slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 86 so that the separation action surface 434b, which is the lower side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434, and the separation inclined portion 417f of the lift control member 417 are in contact with each other. FIG. 88 shows a state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state shown in FIG. State dynamic side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a driving side sliding member 420, a driven side sliding member 3430, a driving device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front side. It mainly includes a plate member 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and operates in a manner to prevent the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

  In the base member 410, the lowering control member 415 and the raising control member 417 are disposed only on the left side in the front view, and the disposition on the right side in the front view is omitted.

  The driven-side slide member 3430 has a third symbol display device 81 at a position eccentric to the left from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is configured to be long in the left-right direction, and the left-right direction of the body member 3431. A functional portion 432 disposed at both ends, a guide hole 433 which is a hole bored in the functional portion 432 in a vertical direction and through which a guide rod 451 is inserted, and rises in the left and right outer directions at a lower end portion of the functional portion 432 A hook-shaped portion 434 extending inclining, a fall prevention portion 435 extending rearward inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional portion 432 (on the side close to the other guide hole 433), Mainly equipped.

  The main body member 3431 is provided with a locking projection 3431a that is provided at the upper end portion thereof to project leftward in front view. The locking projection 3431a is a portion that is locked by a solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and is prevented from falling. The locking convex portion 3431a is inclined downward as the upper surface thereof approaches the front end in the protruding direction.

  The solenoid 3480 includes a rod member 3481 which can be protruded and retracted rightward when viewed from the front, and the lower surface of the rod member 3481 is inclined upward toward the front end in the projecting direction. Note that the solenoid 3480 is in a retracted state when energized, and is in an extended state when not energized, and in this extended state, the tip of the rod member 3481 projects to the left and right center side beyond the tip of the locking projection 3431a. It consists of.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is disposed to be shifted leftward in front view. As a result, while the size of the third symbol display device 81 is ensured, the area divided on the left and right of the third symbol display device 81 is collected at one place (to the right of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84). By configuring as a large area, the degree of freedom of the size of the movable member that can be arranged in the empty area can be improved.

  Since the third symbol display device 81 is disposed closer to the left side when viewed from the front, the load applied to the rack 452 from the driven side slide member 420 is asymmetrical (the left side is larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to incline the posture of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 84, a wiring housing member 423 is provided at the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. At this time, the position G31 of the center of gravity of the wiring housing member 423 is located to the left from the center position of the driving slide member 420, so that the weight of the wiring housing member 423 and the wiring housed in the wiring housing member 423 causes the drive side slide member 420 to move in the drive side. There is a possibility that the slide member 420 receives a load and tilts counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  As described above, since the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily inclined counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the play side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are prevented from rattling during the elevating operation. The rattling between the state in which the 452 maintains the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) and the state in which the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise in front view can be limited (driving slide). The member 420 and the rack 452 can be prevented from tilting clockwise as viewed from the front from the horizontal posture.

  Therefore, the descent regulating member 415 and the elevation regulating member 417 disposed on the left side in the front view guide the elevation movement of the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452 while effectively suppressing the inclination of the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452. I do. On the other hand, since the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not tilted to the right in front view, it is not necessary to dispose the lowering and lowering control members 415 and 417 outside the functional unit 432 on the right in front view. Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the raised position, the wiring housing member 423 rises as compared with the state shown in FIG. 84, and its center of gravity G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. To the left in front view.

  Therefore, the load in the direction in which the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise in a front view increases, and there is a possibility that the mesh relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged at the raised position, the protruding plate 453a is abutted against and supported by the descent restricting member 415. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the posture of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting counterclockwise in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged at the raised position, the locking projection 3431 gets over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking projection 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481. .

  At this time, when the bar member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking projection 3431, the locking projection 3431 can get over the bar member 3481. Thus, the locking projection 3431 can be placed on the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without passing electricity through the solenoid 3480.

  As shown in FIG. 86, even when the drive side slide member 420 is lowered in a state where the driven side slide member 3430 is located at the raised position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 is locked by the locking projection 3431a of the driven side slide member 3430. , The driven slide member 3430 is prevented from descending in conjunction with the drive slide member 420, and the driven slide member 3430 is maintained at the raised position.

  At this time, the driven side slide member 3430 is disposed at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is shifted leftward from the center position when viewed from the front, and the center of gravity is shifted leftward, so that the solenoid 3480 is located only on the left side. Also, it is possible to suppress the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

  That is, when the center of gravity of the driven slide member 3430 is located at the center in the left-right direction, the driven slide member 3430 may be swung clockwise or counterclockwise in a front view due to vibration or the like. If the driven side slide member 3430 inclines clockwise as viewed from the front in a state where the solenoid 3480 is located only on the left side, the locking protrusion 3431a may be displaced from the rod member 3481.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is shifted to the left side in the front view, the driven side slide member 3430 is inclined clockwise in the front view from the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) due to vibration or the like. Is suppressed.

  Therefore, the locking projection 3431a is easily inclined in the direction approaching the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the contact between the locking projection 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained. It is suppressed from falling off.

  Accordingly, it is possible to stably maintain the driven side slide member 3430 at the raised position without disposing the solenoids 3480 on both sides in the left-right direction of the driven side slide member 3430, thereby reducing the number of disposed solenoids 3480. The operation of the driven side slide member 3430 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the rod member 3481 is in the retracted state, the driven slide member 3430 falls. In the process where the driven slide member 3430 falls, since the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the descent regulating member 415 are shifted in the front-rear direction, the hook-shaped portion 434 may be caught by the descent regulating member 415 and cause malfunction. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the hook-shaped portion 434 falls in a state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 is in contact with the separation inclined portion 417 f of the elevation regulating member 417, the elevation regulating member 417 is rotated outward (counterclockwise in FIG. 87) ( Release state).

  As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position, the elevation regulating member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engagement claw 417e of the elevation regulating member 417, The hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed so as to face in the vertical direction (engaged state).

  As shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the state changes from the released state to the engaged state by the rotation of the lift regulating member 417 with respect to the hook-shaped part 434 of the driven side slide member 3430, so that the posture does not change. The amount of load and posture change required to change the disengaged state and the engaged state is increased as compared with the case where the disengaged state and the engaged state are changed by the elasticity of the member. be able to. Accordingly, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven-side slide member 3430 and the elevation regulating member 417 are engaged.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the falling-down of the driven-side slide member 3430 causes the ascent control member 417 to rotate. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving device for forming the engagement state of the elevation regulating member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the opposing wall portion 422f2 protrudes from the lower end portion of the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 at the lower inclined position has been described. However, the drive side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment has a curved shape. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 disposed to oppose the wall portion 422f1 is configured as a planar wall portion extending in the up-down direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member 4420 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a). FIG. 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420. In FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (c), the drive side slide member 4420 is viewed in cross section at the center position of the connecting member 4424 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 89 (a)). Also, FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b) illustrate a downward inclined state of the connecting member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) illustrates an upward inclined state of the connecting member 4424.

  The connection member 4424 includes an extension claw portion 4424f that extends from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b rightward in a front view.

  The extending claw portion 4424f is disposed to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in the upwardly inclined state, is curved so as to be depressed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and as shown in FIG. (B) Right and left direction) A pair of concave portions is provided in the middle part.

  The second passage forming member 4422 includes an opposing wall 4422f2 that is disposed to oppose the curved wall 422f1. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion that extends in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c. The concave portion is arranged so as not to interfere with the extension claw portion 4424f, and the opposite wall portion 4422f2 is shown in FIG. In this state, it is extended to a position overlapping with the extension claw portion 4424f.

  According to the present embodiment, in the downwardly inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (a), there is no portion (such as a protruding portion) that is damaged by the collision of the ball with the path of the ball. When the ball is sent from 520 to the connecting member 4424, it is possible to prevent the member from being damaged by colliding with the ball.

  In the upwardly inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (b), the extended claw portion 4424f and the opposing wall portion 4422f2 guide the ball, so that the ball can be prevented from being clogged near the sensor member 422c.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of one embodiment may be replaced or combined with part or all of one or more other embodiments to constitute a gaming machine.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper end portion (the radially outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened is described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the cover member that covers the open portion at the upper end of the first passage forming member 520 opens the side where the sphere is supplied in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e, and opens the side where the sphere is supplied. The opposite side may operate in a lidded manner. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matter other than a sphere from being mixed into the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the connecting member 424 is rotated while contacting the first passage forming member 520 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the connection member 424 may be omitted. In this case, product cost can be reduced by reducing the number of components required for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Also, instead of the connection member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be provided. In this case, the positional displacement between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber elastic body due to the contact of the first passage forming member 520 with the rubber elastic body. be able to.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the driving-side slide member 420 is driven by the one-layer rack 452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a case where the rack for driving the drive side slide member 420 is composed of two layers in the front and rear, and a case where the drive side slide member 420 is vertically moved by the front rack and a case where the drive side slide member 420 is vertically moved by the rear rack May be configurable. In this case, by adopting a mode in which only one of the two-layer racks abuts on the driven side slide member 430 vertically, the case where the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other, It is possible to switch between a case where the driving slide member 420 moves up and down independently by passing through the driven slide member 430.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b protrude outside the circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the abutting portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b may be recessed toward the center side of a circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth, and the other may protrude longer.

  In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b is the adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape may be formed, and the portion may be configured to abut on the contact portion 351b.

  In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes into contact with the abutting portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b having no tooth shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a surface that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b may be formed by partially cutting the gear teeth of the portion configured in the tooth shape.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the entire overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b contacts the surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by providing a recessed portion that is recessed toward the rotation axis at an intermediate position between the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b, the area per surface may be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right ascent control members 417 abut at the same timing as the drive side slide member 420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the right and left ascent control members 417 may be brought into contact with the drive side slide member 420. In this case, a left-right asymmetric load can be applied to the drive-side slide member 420, and even if the center of gravity of the drive-side slide member 420 is shifted to one of the left and right (one of the left and right), the drive-side slide member 420 is inclined. Can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the distal end wall member 2560 is provided at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an aspect in which a blower that sends air from the distal end of the first passage-forming member 2520 toward the base end side is provided, or an aspect in which a magnetic force generator is provided at the distal end of the first passage-forming member 2520 and a ball is attracted by magnetic force Alternatively, the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 may be vibrated in the rotation direction. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward toward the distal end in the release state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an intermediate portion may be provided between the base end portion and the front end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 (the U-shaped portion may be provided). In this case, if a ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the ball can be retained at an intermediate portion (a position closer to the distal end than the base end), and the state changes to the communication state. In this case, it is possible to shorten a period until the ball is thrown from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the case where the lowering control member 415 and the upward control member 417 are provided on one side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 are disposed on the left and right sides of the base member 410, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for urging the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 are set to the left. There may be a difference between the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided and the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the right side. At this time, the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the right side in the front view is higher than the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the left side in the front view (on the side where the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is closer). It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, the load that changes the posture of the driven side slide member 3430 in the counterclockwise direction (in the direction in which the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted due to the bias of the center of gravity) by the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 disposed on the right side is used. While suppressing, when the driven slide member 3430 changes its posture clockwise in front view due to the sudden vertical movement of the driven slide member 3430, the change in posture can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the driven side slide member 430 falls after the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the lowered position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driven side slide member 430 may be dropped in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the intermediate position. In this state, control (control for repeatedly switching between the ascending operation and the descending operation) may be performed such that the driving-side slide member 420 is operated in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the driven-side slide member 430. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect in which the driven slide member 430 is rebounded by the drive side slide member 420 (for example, repeatedly).

  In each of the above embodiments, the divided member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. Although the case of driving has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The split member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 is connected to one side. The driving may be performed by the rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638. In this case, the distance between the divided member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent divided member DV is widened, so that the adjacent divided member DV and the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 Can be suppressed, and the diameters of the one-side rotation drive member and the other-side rotation drive member can be increased accordingly. As a result, the driving torque applied to the divided member DV (rotating member 640) from the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member can be increased.

  In each of the above embodiments, the period in which the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 Although the case where the period in which the DV is engaged with the driven portion 641 overlaps has been described (see FIG. 75), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the engagement portion 637 b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or another While one of the engaging portions 638b of the side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, the other is not engaged and the engaging portion of the one side rotation driving member 637 is engaged. One of the engaging portions 638b of the other side rotation drive member 638 may be disengaged while the other is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV.

  In this case, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 from being simultaneously engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. . That is, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. Thereby, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, a phase shift occurs between the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 due to a dimensional tolerance, an assembly tolerance, a driving tolerance of the driving motor 631, and the like. In the rotary member 640 formed by connecting the DVs endlessly, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotary drive member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotary drive member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the divided member DV. If a phase shift occurs in a state in which the rotary member 640 is engaged with the portion 641, one section in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 is in a compressed state and the other section is in a tensile state, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. It becomes.

  On the other hand, as described above, the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. By doing so, even if a phase shift occurs, it is possible to avoid that the rotating member 640 is affected by the phase shift. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly, the displacement thereof can be stabilized.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the division members DV are connected endlessly in the rotary unit 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The division members DV are connected endlessly (from one end to the other end). It is naturally possible to connect the dividing member DV until the end, and disconnect one end and the other end). In this case, for example, the end member-connected divided member DV may be displaced (moved) along the endless trajectory in each of the above embodiments, or may be moved along the endless trajectory. The divided member DV connected in an end shape may be reciprocated (reciprocated).

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is given a special game. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, and thus a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure in which the rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted by the locking arc portion 351c is an example>
A game machine comprising: a driving unit; a transmitting member for transmitting a driving force of the driving unit; and a displacement member displaced between an ascending position and a descending position by the driving force transmitted by the transmitting member. The member includes a first gear, a second gear meshed with the first gear, and a second gear disposed closer to the displacement member in the transmission path of the driving force than the first gear. The gear includes a contact portion formed in a part of the tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is in contact with the contact portion of the first gear. The gaming machine A1 wherein the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by the contact.

  Here, there is provided a gaming machine including a driving unit, a transmission member that transmits a driving force of the driving unit, and a displacement member that is displaced between a raised position and a lowered position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack-and-pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the displacement member is moved up and down between the lowered position and the raised position by the linear motion of the rack. (Patent Literature 1: For example, JP 2012-80941 A). In this case, when the driving force of the driving unit is released in a state where the displacement member is arranged at the raised position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. Therefore, it is necessary to continue to apply the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that the energy consumption for holding the displacement member at the raised position increases. On the other hand, a crank mechanism is interposed in a part of the driving means, and by using the dead point of the crank mechanism, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member is prevented from being lowered from its raised position by its own weight. A known structure is also known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-140602), but in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member is enlarged by the provision of the crank mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first gear has the contact portion formed on a part of the tooth profile thereof, and the contact of the first gear when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. Since the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by the predetermined teeth of the second gear abutting on the portion, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member is It is possible to suppress falling by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to suppress energy consumption when the displacement member is held at the raised position. Further, the structure for holding the displacement member at the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and there is no need to separately provide a crank mechanism, so that the size of the transmission member can be reduced. it can.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at an ascending position, the second gear contacts the contact portion of the first gear. A game machine A2 wherein the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by the contact of the receiving portions of the two gears.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, when the receiving portion of the second gear abuts on the abutting portion of the first gear, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises. That is, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the rotation of the second gear is regulated in both the forward and reverse directions, so that the rattling of the displacement member held at the ascending position occurs. Can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A3, wherein in the gaming machine A1 or A2, the rotation of the first gear in a direction in which the displacement member is lowered is allowed in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the rotation of the first gear in a direction to lower the displacement member is allowed. It is not necessary to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear, and by rotating the first gear with the driving force of the driving means, the first gear can be moved to the raised position. The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, while the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered is restricted, the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered is allowed. Therefore, when the displacement member attempts to descend from its raised position by its own weight, the predetermined tooth of the second gear abuts on the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear and displacing the displacement member. Can be held in the raised position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so as to mesh with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction to raise the displacement member, and A gaming machine A4, characterized in that the height of the teeth is lower than that of the teeth of the first gear, and the predetermined teeth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tip surface thereof.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction to raise the displacement member. The first gear is formed in such a manner that the height of the tooth is lower than the teeth of the first gear, and the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tooth tip of the first gear. Is rotated, and when the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the second gear can be rotated in a direction to raise the displacement member through the abutment portion and the meshing of the predetermined teeth. As a result, the state in which the predetermined teeth of the second gear can contact the contact portion of the first gear (the state in which the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). It can be formed reliably.

  In the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a greater tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a larger tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear, so that the predetermined teeth of the second gear abut. Possible areas can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position can be reduced (the tolerance is increased). As a result, a state where the predetermined teeth of the second gear can contact the contact portion of the first gear can be reliably formed.

  Further, the contact portion of the first gear is a portion that receives a predetermined tooth of the second gear and regulates the rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member). Since it is increased, strength can be secured.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the abutment portion of the first gear is formed such that the tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape about the rotation axis of the first gear. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed such that its tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape about the rotation center of the first gear. Therefore, the strength of the first gear can be improved while allowing the first gear to rotate until a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear. Can be planned.

  Further, when the second gear is rotated in a direction of lowering the displacement member and a predetermined tooth of the second gear comes into contact with a contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear, the predetermined gear of the second gear is rotated. The rotation of the first gear can be easily suppressed by setting the direction of the force acting on the contact portion of the first gear from the tooth of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends can be easily regulated, and even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member can be reliably prevented from descending by its own weight.

In the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed on a part of the tooth profile thereof,
In a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the contact portion of the first gear is brought into contact with a receiving portion of the second gear, so that the first member moves in a direction in which the displacement member rises. A gaming machine A7 in which rotation of a gear is regulated.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes the receiving portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and the first gear is in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position. Since the contact portion of the gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is regulated. It can function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after being arranged at the raised position.

  In the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and an arc of the contact portion of the first gear. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being formed into an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the shape.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the first gear has a concave portion. When the contact portion of the first gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, both surfaces are curved. The contact portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the function of the stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is arranged at the raised position can be reliably exerted on the receiving portion of the second gear.

  Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in an arc shape concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion can be increased. Can be increased. This can prevent the receiving portion of the second gear from being damaged when receiving the contact portion of the first gear.

  In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and The gaming machine A9, wherein the displacement member is located at the end of a movable range in a rising direction.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear are in contact with each other. Is disengaged, and the displacement member is located at the end of the movable range in the ascending direction, so that the displacement member is disposed in the ascending position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction to raise the displacement member. Later, while the second gear is stopped, only the first gear can be rotated in the direction in which the displacement member rises. Thereby, the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact part of the first gear (the contact part (tooth surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). Can be reliably formed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is an example>
A first passage member and a second passage member formed so as to allow passage of a sphere, wherein at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other; A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member; and a first passage member and a second passage member in which one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member. In a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state in which the first and second passage members are not communicated with each other, the first and second passage members are displaceably disposed at one end of the first and second passage members. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a connecting member that connects one end of the first passage member and one end of the second passage member in a state of being displaced by contacting the other of the two passage members.

  Here, a first passage member and a second passage member are formed so that the ball can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member so that the first passage member and the second passage member are not connected. There is known a gaming machine capable of forming a communication separated state (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171636). In this case, it is inevitable that variations occur in the stop position and the arrangement position of the second passage member when the first passage member is displaced due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of each component. For this reason, in the communicating state, the position of one end of the first passage member and the position of the one end of the second passage member are displaced, so that it is difficult to stably throw the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the gaming machine B1 is disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and is displaced by contacting the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. Since the first and second passage members include a connecting member for communicating between one ends of the first and second passage members, even if the positions of the first and second passage members are misaligned, one end of each of the first and second passage members is displaced. The displacement can be absorbed by the displacement of the connection portion interposed between the members. Thereby, the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized. Further, with the displacement of the first passage member, the first passage member comes into contact with the connection member and displaces the connection member, so that the driving force for displacing the first passage member can be used, and the connection member is displaced. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving force to be performed.

  In the gaming machine B1, the connection member includes one side wall portion and another side wall portion that are arranged to face each other across an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the one side wall portion includes: When the first passage member is located on the displacement trajectory of the first passage member, the first passage member is displaced, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member abuts on one side wall of the connection member. The gaming machine B2, wherein the connection member is displaced, and the other side wall of the connection member is brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member comes into contact with one side wall of the connection member. Since the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connecting member are connected in the communicating state. , Can be made closer to one end of the first passage member and the second passage member, and the displacement between the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, the feeding of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by the first passage member being rotated with one end thereof being a rotation tip side, and the connection member has a rotation axis parallel to a rotation axis of the first passage member. When the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall of the connection member, the connection member is rotated, and The gaming machine B3, wherein the other side wall of the connection member is close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by the first passage member being rotated with one end thereof being a rotation tip side, and the connection member is connected to the first passage member. Since the rotation axis is provided in parallel with the rotation axis of the member, the displacement (rotation) of the connection member accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member can be smoothly performed. In addition, by utilizing the rotation operations of both, the other side wall of the connection member can be brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, in the communication state, one of the opposing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion has a sphere from the first passage member to the second passage member. A gaming machine B4, which is a rolling surface when a ball is thrown, and in the communication state, the one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of a ball in a communicating portion between one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member. That is, since the communicating portion between the one end of the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member is a portion in which the positional deviation becomes large, where the feeding of the ball becomes unstable, a rolling surface of the ball in the communicating portion is formed. The one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member, so that the ball can be rolled and the throwing ball can be stabilized.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be sent from one end of the first passage member, and in the release state, the ball in the first passage member is not moved. A gaming machine B5 comprising: a throwing regulation means for regulating that a ball is thrown from one end of the first passage member.

  Here, in the release state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated with each other. When the ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball that has passed through the first passage member may fall outside the game area. In the communicating state, even if the ball is supplied to the first passage member, if the ball stays in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the release state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball that has stayed in the game area may fall into the game area. If the ball falls out of the game area, the movement of the movable member such as the gear or the crank mechanism may be hindered, or the movable member may be damaged by being caught by the ball.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be sent from one end of the first passage member in the communication state. In addition, in the released state, the ball is provided with a ball feed restricting means for restricting the ball in the first passage member from being sent from one end of the first path member. In addition, even when the state is shifted from the communication state to the release state while the ball remains in the first passage member, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

  In the gaming machine B5, a cover body is provided at one end of the first passage member, the cover body allowing passage of the ball in the communicating state and restricting the passage of the ball in the released state, and the cover body is configured to restrict the throwing of the ball. A gaming machine B6, which forms means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B5, a cover as a ball-throwing restricting means is provided at one end of the first passage member, which allows passage of the ball in the communicating state and regulates passage of the ball in the released state. Since the body is disposed, for example, even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the release state, or when the state transitions from the communication state to the release state while the ball remains in the first passage member, the first passage The ball can be prevented from falling out of the game area from one end of the member.

  In the gaming machine B5, an urging member that applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that regulates the passage of the ball, and acts on the cover body with the displacement of the first passage member. A game machine B7, comprising: an operating member that displaces the cover body in a direction that allows the ball to pass when at least the communication state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, since the urging member is provided to apply an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position for restricting the passage of the ball, the cover in the released state is provided. Inadvertent displacement of the body can be suppressed, and as a result, the ball can be more reliably prevented from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in a direction allowing the ball to pass, so that the ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member.

  In this case, since the displacement of the cover body in the direction allowing the ball to pass is performed along with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the action member, the driving means for displacing the first passage member is displaced by the cover body. It can also be used as a driving means for driving, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The acting member is positioned on the displacement trajectory of the cover body due to the displacement of the first passage member, and comes into contact with the cover body displaced along the displacement trajectory, thereby resisting the urging force of the urging member. (For example, a second passage member, a connecting member, a member fixed to a game board, etc.) and a driving force of a driving means for displacing the first passage member. To the cover body to displace the cover body together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or a rack and pinion that converts the driving means and the driving force into a rotary motion or a linear motion and transmits the same to the cover body) ) Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B5, the throwing regulation means arranges the first passage member in such a state that one end of the first passage member is at an uppermost position in the released state.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B5, the throwing regulation means disposes the first passage member in a released state in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position. Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball is retained in the first passage member and transitions from the communicating state to the released state, the ball is moved out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. Falling can be suppressed.

  In the release state, the first passage member arranged such that one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position does not need to be entirely inclined upward. There may be a part of the region which is horizontal or inclined downward.

  In the gaming machine B5, the throwing restricting means arranges the first passage member in a posture inclined upward from the other end to one end of the first passage member in the released state. Gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B5, the throwing restricting means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end in the released state. Therefore, for example, even when a ball is supplied to the first passage member in the release state, or when the state is shifted from the communication state to the release state while the ball remains in the first passage member, the ball is supplied from one end of the first passage member. Can be easily suppressed from falling outside the game area.

  Further, in the case of forming the communication state, it is possible to form a state in which the entire first passage member is inclined downward from the other end to one end, so that the ball can be easily sent from the first passage member to the second passage member. In this way, the ball can be prevented from staying on the way. Therefore, when the state shifts to the release state, it is possible to suppress the ball remaining in the first passage member from falling into the game area.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed to allow a ball to pass therethrough, a one-side position for distributing a ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage, and A distributing member that is displaced between the other side position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the downstream passage, wherein the case body is formed with both sides in the displacement direction of the distributing member open. A gaming machine B10.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed with both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member open, so that the case body is moved to one side position or the other side position. Even when the ball flows down between the distribution member displaced toward the case and the case body, it is possible to suppress the flowed-down ball from being caught between the distribution member and the case body.

  In the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the one side position; The gaming machine B11, wherein the distributing member is disposed at the other side position when the release state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement member is disposed at one side position and the other side position according to the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the driving means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the distribution member, and the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, in the structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, if the displacement state of the distribution member and the first passage member is shifted due to the occurrence of control failure, the release state is set. The ball is distributed to the first passage member in (1) (that is, the distribution member is disposed at one side position), and the ball may fall out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, in the gaming machine B10, since the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, the displacement state between the distribution member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if a control failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the ball from being distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the distribution member is always positioned on the other side). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

  In the gaming machine B11, the gaming machine B12 is characterized in that the first passage member includes a wall section that defines a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall section of the first passage member is the distribution member.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall that defines a passage through which the ball passes, and the wall of the first passage member is a distribution member. In addition, parts can be shared and the cost of parts can be reduced. In addition, by using the wall portion that divides the passage through which the ball passes as the sorting member, the sorted ball can flow down to the passage without fail.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which a structure for restricting the rebound of the driven slide member 430 is an example>
A guide member extending vertically, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between an ascending position and a descending position, and supporting the displacement member at the descending position A support member and an elevating member formed so as to be able to move up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the lifting member is raised. In addition, in a gaming machine in which the displacement member is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position by its own weight as the lifting member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position, the displacement member moves in the rising direction. A gaming machine C1 comprising a rise regulating member for regulating displacement.

  Here, a guide member extending vertically, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between an ascending position and a descending position, and supporting the displacing member at the descending position A supporting member and a lifting member formed so as to be able to move up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lower position to the upper position by being pushed up by the raising and lowering member with the raising of the raising and lowering member, There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from a raised position to a lowered position by its own weight as the lifting member is lowered (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is maintained on the lower position by being placed on the support member and supported by the support member. However, since the displacement member is placed on the support member and can be displaced in the ascending direction along the guide member, rattling is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position There is a problem that is unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided along the guide member at the descending position because the displacing member is provided with the elevation regulating member for regulating the displacement of the displacing member in the ascending direction when the displacing member is lowered to the descending position. Displacement in the ascending direction can be restricted, and rattling due to disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C1, there is provided an urging means for urging the elevation regulating member in a direction approaching the displacement member, and the displacement member comes into contact with the elevation regulation member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A separating action portion for displacing the lift restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member, and allowing the lift restricting member to be displaced in a direction approaching the displacement member at the lowered position, and A gaming machine C2 comprising: an engaging portion that engages.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is configured to displace the lift regulating member in a direction away from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight; In this case, since the movable member is provided with an engaging portion that engages with the rising restricting member, the restricted state by the rising restricting member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacement member to its lowered position by its own weight, and the restricted state by the rising restricting member is formed. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving source for performing the operation. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost of the product can be reduced.

  In addition, since the engagement between the rise regulating member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the displacement regulating member to be displaced in a direction approaching the displacement member, the engagement between the rising regulating member and the engaging portion is accordingly made. The force required to release the engagement and the displacement of the elevation restriction member can be increased. As a result, even when disturbance is input, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement between the rise restricting member and the engaging portion.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C2, the release of the engagement between the elevation regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C2, the disengagement of the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member. Can be suppressed from being inadvertently disengaged from the engagement of the ascending restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member.

  In addition, since the release of the engagement between the lifting restricting member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the lifting member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for releasing the engagement, and The drive source for raising and lowering the member can also be used as a drive source for releasing the engagement between the lift restricting member and the engagement portion of the displacement member, thereby reducing the product cost. .

  Further, in the case where a drive source for releasing the engagement between the elevation regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is separately provided, for example, due to the occurrence of a control failure, the engagement portion between the elevation regulating member and the displacement member may In a state where the lifting member may rise and push up the displacement member in a state in which the engagement of the lifting member is not released, according to the gaming machine C3, the release of the engagement between the lifting restriction member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is canceled. This can be performed in accordance with the operation of lifting the displacement member by the lifting member as the lifting member is raised. Can be reliably released.

  In the gaming machine C3, when the elevating member is lifted, the elevating member comes into contact with the ascending restricting member to displace the ascending restricting member. A gaming machine C4 comprising a release action portion for releasing the engagement.

  Here, the disengagement of the ascending restricting member from the engaging portion of the displacement member can be performed by a pushing force when the displacement member is pushed up as the elevating member moves up and down. In this case, the pushing force is used. Therefore, it is necessary to make the engagement state such that the engagement state can be released, and it becomes difficult to firmly engage. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, a vibration is generated by the reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C3, the elevating member comes into contact with the elevating restricting member when the elevating member is raised, thereby displacing the elevating restricting member, thereby restricting the elevating. Since the release action portion for releasing the engagement between the member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is provided, even when the ascent control member and the engaging portion of the displacement member are firmly engaged, the release is reliably performed. be able to. In other words, since the strong engagement state can be formed, it is possible to suppress the play of the displacement member due to the disturbance and to stabilize the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position. Moreover, the vibration due to the recoil when the engagement is released can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the engagement of the displacement member with the engagement portion of the displacement member is released, the elevation regulating member may move the displacement member up and down between the descending position and the ascending position. A gaming machine C5 to be abutted.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the lift regulating member moves the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position when the engagement of the displacement member with the engagement portion is released. Since it is in contact with the elevating member to be moved up and down, it functions as a guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is moved up and down. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down with the elevating member.

  In the gaming machine C5, the lifting control member abutting on the elevating member is urged by the urging means in a direction approaching the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C5, the lifting regulating member abutting on the elevating member is urged by the urging means in a direction approaching the elevating member. And the posture can be stabilized. In addition, the rattling of the elevating member can be suppressed by the elastic buffering action of the urging means.

  In the gaming machine C6, a drive unit, a pinion rotationally driven by the drive unit, and a rack meshed with the pinion, the rack is disposed on the elevating member, the elevating member, A gaming machine C7, wherein the rack is urged by the urging means in a direction away from the pinion via an ascent control member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the rotational motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member moves up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. You. In this case, the elevating member is urged in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the elevating member, so that the distance between the rack and the tooth surface of the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the elevating member rattles in a direction in which the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is reduced, the urging force of the urging means acts in a direction in which the distance is increased, while the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is increased. In the case where the elevating member is rattled, it is possible to restrict the interval from becoming larger than a predetermined value by the guiding structure of the guiding member. Therefore, the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion becomes narrow, and it is possible to prevent the toothing resistance from becoming excessive.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, a gaming machine C8 including a descent regulating member that regulates displacement of the elevating member in a descending direction when the elevating member pushes the displacement member up to the ascending position.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, when the elevating member pushes the displacement member up to the ascending position, the ascending / descending member is provided with the descent regulating member for regulating the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction. The displaced member and the elevating member provided can be supported by the descent restricting member. As a result, a driving force for holding the displacement member at the ascending position can be made unnecessary, so that energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

  Further, since the regulation by the descent regulating member is performed by raising the elevating member, there is no need to separately provide a driving source for forming the regulation by the descent regulating member, and a driving source for elevating the elevating member is provided. Can also be used as a drive source for forming the regulation by the descending regulation member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C8, the release of the regulation by the descending regulation member is performed by lowering the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, the release of the restriction by the descent restricting member is performed by lowering the elevating member, so that it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing the restriction. The drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member can also be used as a drive source for releasing the restriction of the descent restricting member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, in the case where a drive source for releasing the restriction by the descent restricting member is separately provided, for example, when the restriction by the descent restricting member is not released due to the occurrence of a control failure, the lifting / lowering member is moved down to drive. Where the overload may act on the source or the descent regulating member may be damaged, according to the gaming machine C9, the restriction by the descent regulating member can be released in synchronization with the descending operation of the elevating member. When the elevating member is lowered, the state in which the restriction by the descent restricting member is surely released can be formed.

  In the case where the descent restricting member is a structure that restricts the displacement of the displacement member in the descent direction instead of the elevating member, the structure in which the restriction by the descent restricting member is released along with the descent of the elevating member is complicated. However, according to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the descent restricting member has a structure for restricting the displacement of the elevating member in the descent direction, the release of the restriction by the descent restricting member is accompanied by the descent of the elevating member. The structure to be performed can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine C8 or C9, in a state where the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction is regulated by the descending regulating member, the ascending regulating member is in contact with the elevating member, and the descending regulating member is in contact with the elevating member. A gaming machine C10, wherein the contacting direction is different from the contacting direction of the elevation regulating member to the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in the gaming machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the descent regulating member contacts the elevating member and the direction in which the elevating regulating member contacts the elevating member are different directions. The rattling of the lifting member in different directions can be suppressed by the restriction member and the lifting restriction member. As a result, the posture of the elevating member can be effectively stabilized.

  The gaming machine C10 includes a driving unit, a pinion that is driven to rotate by the driving unit, and a rack that meshes with the pinion. The rack is disposed on the elevating member. A gaming machine C11, which is in contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to a tooth surface of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the rotational motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into linear motion of the rack, and the linear motion causes the elevating member to move up and down along the guide member. In this case, the rack (elevating member) can be displaced in a direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, and the descending regulating member abuts on the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the rack (elevating member) from being displaced relative to the pinion in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the ascent control member and the support member can contact the displacement member from one side and the other side across the guide member. , A gaming machine C12.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the rising regulating member and the supporting member are on one side and the other side of the guiding member. Are provided so as to be able to abut against the displacement member, so that the rattling in either direction of the displacement member with respect to the guide member to one side or the other side is regulated by the abutment member or the support member, respectively. it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member disposed at the lowered position from rattling due to disturbance.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the rising restriction member abut on the displacement member while changing their positions along the extending direction of the guide member. The gaming machine C13, wherein the gaming machine C13 is disposed as possible, and the support member is disposed above the elevation restriction member.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the rising restriction member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member. The displacement member is disposed so as to be able to abut against the displacement member while being different from each other. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member disposed at the lowered position from rattling due to disturbance.

  Further, since the support member is disposed above the elevation regulating member, the support member does not hinder the elevation of the elevating member, and a space for the elevating member to elevate can be secured. Therefore, the degree of freedom of design can be secured.

<About the concept of the invention in which a structure in which the detected portion 641 of the rotating member 640 is detected by the detection sensor 684 is an example>
In a gaming machine having a movable member movably formed and a detecting means for detecting a moving position of the moving member, the detecting means is arranged at irregular intervals along the moving direction of the moving member. A gaming machine D1 comprising: a plurality of detected parts provided; and a plurality of detection sensors disposed on a movement locus of the detected part.

  Here, there has been known a gaming machine including a rotatable moving member and a detecting means for detecting a rotational position of the moving member (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-46467). According to this gaming machine, the detecting means includes the plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit arranged to face each other with the slit interposed therebetween, and the light receiving unit receives light. The number of pulses of the pulse signal is cumulatively added, and the amount of rotation of the moving member from the reference position (that is, the rotational position) is detected based on the cumulatively added pulse number. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a failure in light reception of the light receiving unit or the like, a deviation occurs between the rotational position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number, and the rotational position of the moving member cannot be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, the subsequent detection results are affected, and each time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the detecting means includes a plurality of detected portions provided on the moving member at unequal intervals along the direction of the movement, and a plurality of detected portions arranged on the movement locus of the detected portion. Since a plurality of detection sensors are provided, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based on a combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the plurality of detecting sensors, and the past detecting result of the detecting sensor is required to detect the moving position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction, and the detected portion is one of the plurality of divided members. And a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on an arrangement interval of the divided members. Gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, and the detected portion Is disposed on some of the plurality of divided members and is not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are disposed on the basis of the arrangement intervals of the divided members. Therefore, each time the movable member is displaced by an amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members, the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be made different. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the moving amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members as the minimum unit.

  Note that a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members, which means that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of divided members. Means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is disposed at a position where the presence or absence of the detected portion of the corresponding divided member can be detected.

  In the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of divided members have an interval smaller than the first interval. And a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on an arrangement interval of the divided members in the first section. A gaming machine D3, which is disposed above.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval, and a plurality of divided members that are larger than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval, which is a narrow interval, is formed, the length of the moving member can be reduced as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In this case, the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected part in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the divided members in the first section. Space required for disposing the detection sensor can be easily secured. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (second interval) of the divided members in the second section, it is not necessary to consider the space for disposing the detection sensor, and therefore, the second interval is set to be smaller. Can be set to a small interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed from this point as well.

  In the gaming machine D3, the divided member includes a main body member on which the detected member is disposed, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and main body portions of adjacent divided members. The distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member. In the first section, the link member is displaced. The gaming machine D4, wherein the end of the gaming machine D4 is restricted from being displaced in a direction in which the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D3, both ends of the divided member can be displaced to the main body member on which the detected member is disposed and the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member. And the link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member, so that the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased. Further, the structure for forming the second section can be simplified.

  In this case, in the first section, the link member reaches the end of displacement, and the displacement of the divided member in the direction of increasing the interval between the adjacent divided members is restricted. Therefore, the detection in the direction of increasing the interval is performed. Variations in the position of the part can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

  The gaming machine D4 includes a base member on which the division member is displaceably disposed, and the base member guides a main body guide portion and a link member for guiding the main body member when the division member is displaced. When the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, the link guide portion acts on the link member, and the main body member and the adjacent A gaming machine D5 wherein the attitude of the link member with respect to the main body member of the divided member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D4, the base member includes a main body guide portion that guides the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a link guide portion that guides the link member. The guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member, and changes the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. With the change in the attitude of the link member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by a link guide portion of the base member, and the link guide portion of the base member is slidably inserted through the guided portion of the link member. A gaming machine D6, wherein the gaming machine D6 is formed in a groove shape having a width corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guiding portion of the base member, and the link guiding portion of the base member is guided by the link member. The portion is formed in a groove shape slidably inserted, and the width of the groove is set to a size corresponding to the outer shape of the link member. Therefore, the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. Thereby, since it is possible to reliably regulate that the divided member is displaced in a direction to increase the interval between the adjacent divided members, it is possible to suppress a variation in the position of the detection target in the direction to increase the interval. The detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the division member includes a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the main body member, and in the first section, abuts on a main body member of the adjacent division member. The gaming machine D7, wherein the displacement member is displaced to a position, and the displacement of the divided member is restricted in a direction to reduce a distance between the divided member and an adjacent divided member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the division member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member. The displacement member is displaced to a position where it abuts on the main body member, and the displacement of the divided member in the direction of narrowing the gap with the adjacent divided member is regulated. Therefore, the detection target in the direction of narrowing the gap is detected. Can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure for adjusting the interval between the divided members DV in the moving member 640 is an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member movably formed, the movable member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction. A first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval smaller than the first interval. A gaming machine E1 wherein a section is formed.

  Here, a gaming machine having a rotatable moving member is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, an effect can be produced by displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information on the front of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and making the player visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more, so if the number of displayed identification information is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter, which is necessary for arrangement. While the space is increased, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of displayed identification information is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval and an interval in which the plurality of divided members is smaller than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be reduced as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed. That is, the space required for disposing the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on each of the divided members, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed while ensuring the number of displayed identification information.

  In the gaming machine E1, the divided member includes a main body member, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and a main body portion of an adjacent divided member, wherein the link member includes the main body member and the link member. A gaming machine E2 wherein the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body of the adjacent divided member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the dividing member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent dividing member. Since the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, the first section and the second section are formed. Can be simplified.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a base member on which the divided member is displaceably disposed, and the base member guides a main body guide portion and a link member for guiding the main body member when the divided member is displaced. When the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, the link guide portion acts on the link member, and the main body member and the adjacent A gaming machine E3 wherein the attitude of the link member with respect to the main body member of the divided member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E2, the base member includes a main body guiding portion that guides the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a link guiding portion that guides the link member. The guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member, and changes the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. With the change in the attitude of the link member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the division member includes a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the main body member, and the displacement member has a posture inclined to the side of the adjacent division member in the first section. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the second section is in a more upright posture than the posture in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, in the first section, the displacement member is in a posture inclined toward the adjacent divided member, so that the displacement member is visually recognized by the player. Can be easier. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be improved. Further, in the first section, since the interval between the divided members is widened, a space for the displacement member to tilt can be secured, and the displacement member can be enlarged accordingly. Therefore, also from this point, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the second section, the displacing member is set to a more upright posture than the posture in the first section, so that the displacing member can be separated from the main body member of the adjacent divided member, and accordingly, the main body members can be separated from each other. To reduce the distance between them. That is, the second interval in the second section can be reduced. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable on an upper surface of the main body member, and is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member in the second section. Gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, is higher than the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member. Since it is provided, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to each other until they come into contact with each other, and the interval between them can be made narrower. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E3, the orbit of the main body guide of the base member is formed in a circular shape.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the orbit of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape, so that the structure for guiding the main body guide portion of the base member to displace the main body member is provided. Can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E3, the trajectory of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is such that all of the plurality of divided members are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval. A gaming machine E7 characterized by having a radius equal to that of a circular arrangement.

  Here, a first section in which a plurality of divided members are circumferentially connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members in a circumferential direction connected at a second interval which is smaller than the first interval. When the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter, referred to as “the former case”), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter, referred to as “the latter”). Can be shortened in the circumferential direction, so that the space required for disposing the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. However, when the orbits of the plurality of divided members are formed in a circular shape, the radius in the former case is smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the divided members of the first section in the former case, based on the number and the radius of the divided members in the first section, the actual number as the total number of the divided members forming the moving member is determined. Recall fewer numbers than.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E3, the trajectory of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is such that all of the plurality of divided members are formed. Since the radius is equal to that of a circular arrangement by connecting in the circumferential direction at the first interval, the number of the plurality of divided members is secured, and the space required for disposing the plurality of divided members is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to remind the player of a number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Drive Mechanism 630 as an Example>
A moving member formed by connecting a base member on which the guide portion is extended, a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and applying a driving force to the moving member. A driving section, wherein the guide section of the base member acts on the division member to set the interval between the division members to a first interval; and A second guide portion for setting the interval between the divided members at a narrow second interval, wherein the driving means includes a rotary drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the split member, and The gaming machine F1, wherein the plurality of divided members are displaced along a guide portion of the base member by rotating the member while engaging the engagement portion with the divided member.

  Here, a gaming machine having a rotatable moving member is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, an effect can be produced by displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information on the front of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and making the player visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more, so if the number of displayed identification information is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter, which is necessary for arrangement. While the space is increased, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of displayed identification information is reduced.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and the moving member has a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval and a section smaller than the first interval. By forming a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the second interval of the interval, compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval, the number of the divided members is secured while maintaining the number of the divided members. The space required for arranging the divided members can be suppressed. That is, when identifying information is displayed on each divided member, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information. I thought.

  However, a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval is connected to the moving member in which the plurality of divided members are connected, and the plurality of divided members are connected at the second interval smaller than the first interval. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to displace the moving member with respect to the base member while forming a section to be formed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member, and the first guide portion sets the interval between the divided members to the first interval, and is smaller than the first interval. A second guide for setting an interval between the divided members at the second interval, wherein the driving means includes a rotary drive member having an engaging portion engageable with the divided member, and the rotary drive member is Since the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by rotating the portions while engaging the portions with the divided members, the intervals between the divided members are wide and narrow (the first interval). The moving member can be displaced with respect to the base member while forming the section and the second interval) in the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F1, the rotating drive member is provided with a plurality of the engaging portions.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, a plurality of engaging portions are formed on the rotary driving member, so that the efficiency of transmitting the driving force from the rotary driving member to the moving member is improved. Can be.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the moving member is formed by connecting the plurality of divided body members in an endless manner in a circumferential direction, and the driving unit includes two of the rotation driving members, and A gaming machine F3, wherein driving members are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, since the two rotary drive members are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, the two rotary drive members are provided from the rotary drive member to the movable member. Driving force can be distributed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the moving member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the bias of the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the two rotation driving members cause the phases of the circular trajectories to differ by 180 degrees. Gaming machine F4, wherein the gaming machine F4 is disposed at a different position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F3, the orbits of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the two rotary driving members are circular orbits. Are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase with each other, so that the driving force from the rotary driving member can be applied to the two most distant portions of the moving member (plurality of divided members). As a result, In addition, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the second rotary drive member is configured such that while the engagement portion of one rotary drive member is not engaged with the split member, the engagement portion of the other rotary drive member is disengaged. A gaming machine F5, wherein the phases of the engaging portions are different from each other such that the engaging portions are engaged with the divided members.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3 or F4, the two rotary drive members are connected to one another while the engagement portion of one rotary drive member is not engaged with the divided member. Since the phases of the engaging portions are arranged so as to be different from each other so that the engaging portions of the rotary driving member are engaged with the divided members, the engaging portions of one rotary driving member and the other rotary driving member are arranged. It is possible to avoid that the engaging portion and the splitting member are simultaneously disengaged from each other, and it is possible to suppress intermittent transmission of the driving force from the rotary driving member to the moving member. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  That is, in the configuration in which the plurality of divided members are connected endlessly as in the present invention, when the transmission of the driving force from the rotary driving member to the moving member becomes intermittent, the division and the transmission of the driving force are performed together with the release. Since the distance between the members is increased or decreased, the posture of the entire moving member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, one of the engagement portion of the one rotation drive member and the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member is always engaged with the split member, and the driving force is always applied to the moving member. Can be formed, so that the interval between the divided members can be easily kept constant. As a result, even if the moving member is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members endlessly, the posture thereof can be stabilized. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion with which an engaging portion of the rotation driving unit is engaged, and the engaged portion is a track of the plurality of divided members. A gaming machine F6, which is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion with which the engaging portion of the rotary drive unit is engaged, and Since the portion is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the track of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (the plurality of divided members) with respect to the amount of rotation of the rotary drive member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the driving torque applied from the rotary driving member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotation drive member is disposed at a position where the engagement portion can be engaged with the divided member guided along a first guide portion of the guide portion. A gaming machine F7.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the rotation drive member is a divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, the divided members are separated from each other. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member guided in a state where the interval is widened, interference between the adjacent divided member and the rotary driving member can be suppressed, and accordingly, the rotary driving member Can be increased in diameter. As a result, the driving torque applied from the rotary driving member to the moving member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member displaced along the guide portion so that the interval between the divided members is set to the first interval or the second interval. A third guide portion that transitions from the interval to the second interval or the first interval, and the rotation driving member is configured to be attached to the divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portion. A gaming machine F8, wherein the gaming machine F8 is provided at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in the gaming machine according to any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotary drive member is a divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, that is, an adjacent divided portion. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member whose interval with the member is changed from the first interval or the second interval to the second interval or the first interval, the guide portion is provided. The division member which receives a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide) can be directly driven by the rotary driving member. As a result, it is possible to suppress bending of the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members in the middle, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the divided member includes a main body member displaced along the guide portion, and one end rotatably connected to the main body member and a main body member of an adjacent divided member. A link member whose end is slidably connected, wherein one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member, respectively, so that the split member and The distance between the adjacent divided members is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotary drive member is a main body member of the divided member, and a portion where the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected. The gaming machine F9, wherein one end of the link member is engaged at a position close to a portion where the link member is rotatably connected.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member is connected to the main body member displaced along the guide portion, and one end is rotatably connected to the main body member. A link member having the other end slidably connected to the main body member of the adjacent divided member, wherein one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member, respectively. Thereby, the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotary drive member is the main body member of the divided member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected. The one end of the link member is engaged at a position closer to the portion where the link member is rotatably connected than the portion where the link member is rotatably connected. When that can be easily transmitted through the body member to the link member of divided member adjacent the displacement of the body member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the gaming machine F10 is provided with driving gears which are arranged concentrically with a circle which is a track of the plurality of divided members and are respectively meshed with the two rotary driving members.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the driving gears are respectively meshed with the two rotation driving members, the two rotation driving members are synchronized by rotating the driving gears. It can be rotated in the state where it was done. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is disposed concentrically with the circle which is the trajectory of the plurality of divided members, the drive gear and the rotary drive member of the second member are moved (the plurality of divided members) in front view of the base member. Can be arranged inward of the outer circumference of the movement trajectory. That is, since the driving gear and the rotary driving member 2 are not protruded outside the outer shape of the moving member, the size can be reduced accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7 and F1 to F10, the gaming machine K1 is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a dynamic display of an identification information sequence composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, followed by a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine K2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode so that balls can be won, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as a prize ball) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7 and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Gaming machine K3 characterized by the following. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a rotatable rotating member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-115426).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that when a plurality of divided members are connected endlessly to form a rotating member, it is difficult to displace the rotating member.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of displacing a rotating member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, in the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1, the base member on which the guide portion is extended and the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are connected. And a driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member, wherein the guide portion of the base member acts on the dividing member to set an interval between the dividing members to a first distance. A first guide portion for setting an interval; and a second guide portion for setting an interval between the divided members at a second interval smaller than the first interval, wherein the driving means is engaged with the divided member. A rotation driving member having a mating engagement portion, the rotation driving member being rotated while engaging the engagement portion with the division member, whereby the plurality of division members are guided by the guide portion of the base member. Is displaced along.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a plurality of the engaging portions are formed in the rotary drive member.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the plurality of divided members are connected endlessly in a circumferential direction to form the moving member, and the driving device The means comprises two of said rotary drive members, said two rotary drive members being arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of said moving member.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the moving member can be displaced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the transmission efficiency of the driving force can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board
100-104 board box 330 lifting body (displacement member)
341 Drive motor (drive means)
351 First gear (first gear, part of transmission member)
351b Contact portion 352 Second gear (second gear, part of transmission member)
354b Receiving part 354c Adjacent gear teeth (predetermined teeth)
413 Locking part (supporting member)
415 Down regulating member 417 Ascending regulating member 417c Release projection (release action section)
417g torsion spring (biasing means)
420 Drive side slide member (part of lifting member)
422 Second passage forming member (second passage member, action member)
422b Shaft support (rotary shaft)
422f accommodation recess ( accommodation part, part of action member)
424 Connection member 424a Cylindrical part (rotary shaft)
424b Upper side wall (one side wall)
424c Lower wall (other side wall)
430, 3430 Followed slide member (displacement member)
434a Engagement surface (engagement part)
434b Separation action surface (separation action part)
441 Drive motor (drive means)
442 Drive gear (pinion)
451 Guide rod (guide member)
452 rack (part of lifting member)
453 Contact wall (part of lifting member)
510,2510 Base member (part of case body)
512 Shaft support hole (rotary shaft)
515,2515 Downflow passage (downstream passage)
520, 2520 First passage forming member (first passage member)
521, 521 Allocation base member (allocation member)
521c Shaft support (rotary shaft)
521e Distribution convex part (wall part)
550 Cover member (part of case body)
552 Introduction cylindrical part (upstream passage)
2560 Tip wall member (throwing regulation means, cover body)
2562 torsion spring (biasing member)
620 Guide member (base member, body guide)
621 Connection link action groove (link guide, guide)
621a Large diameter part (first guide part)
621b Small diameter part (second guide part)
621c connection part (third guide part)
630 Drive mechanism (drive means)
634 Central transmission member (drive gear)
637 One-side rotation drive member (rotation drive member)
637b Engagement part 638 Other side rotation drive member (rotation drive member)
638b Engaging part 640 Rotating member (moving member)
DV split member 641 Engaged part 641c Detected part (detection means)
642 Back side body (body member)
643 Front side body (body member)
644 connecting link member (link member)
644a insertion part (guided part)
646 Display board (displacement member)
684 detection sensor (detection means)
S1 First section S2 Second section

Claims (2)

Comprises a first passage member and the second passage member spheres are formed can pass, in that at least the first passage member is displaced, one end each other of the first passage member and the second passage member is communicated with the communication with the first throw of the ball from the passage member to the second passage member is possible, one end of the first passage member is spaced from one end of the second passage member and the first passage member and the In a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state in which the second passage member is not communicated,
Wherein together is arranged displaceably on one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, said in a state where the other to the displaced in contact with the first passage member or the second passage member and the first with a connection member that communicates between one end each other of the passage member and the second passage member,
Wherein one of the first passage member or the second passage member, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a storage portion for storing the connection member.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.

Images